Professional Documents
Culture Documents
21)
6F0012720BS
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
Service advisor:
All rights on changes are reserved.
Telephone:
❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.21
Introduction
Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- WARNING
hicle. Read and always observe safety infor-
With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy mation concerning the passenger's
a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology front airbag ››› page 30, Fitting and us-
and top quality features. ing child seats.
We recommend reading this Instruction Man-
ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle
so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily
driving.
Information about handling is complemented
with instructions regarding the operation and
maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure
its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we
want to give you valuable advice and tips to
drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting
the environment.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.
SEAT, S.A.
About this manual direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-
ted.
WARNING
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
This instruction manual is valid for all variants This instruction manual has been written for tion about safety and warn you about
and versions of your SEAT model. It describes left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive possible accident or injury risks.
all equipment and models without specifying vehicles, the arrangement of the controls dif-
whether they are optional equipment or fers partly from that shown in the illustrations
or described in the texts. CAUTION
model variants. As a result, equipment not fit-
ted to your vehicle or only available in certain Texts after this symbol indicate possible
Technical modifications to the vehicle or
countries may be described. Find out about damage to the vehicle.
safety-critical issues that have arisen since
your vehicle's equipment in the documenta-
the time of going to press will be included in a
tion supplied with it and please contact your
supplement to the on-board documentation. For the sake of the environment
SEAT Official SEAT Service if you require
more detailed information. Texts after this symbol contain informa-
® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-
tion about the protection of the environ-
All information provided in instruction manual sence of this symbol does not guarantee
that the term is not a trademark. ment.
corresponds to the information available at
the time of going to press. As the vehicle is It indicates that the section continues on
under continuous development, it may have the next page. Note
differences to the data included in this man- Texts after this symbol contain addition-
ual. For this reason, no claims can be made in You can access the information in this manual
al information.
the event of mismatching data, illustrations using:
and descriptions. ● Thematic table of contents that follows the
Ensure that the on-board documentation is manual’s general chapter structure.
kept in the vehicle at all times if you sell it or ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics
lend it to third parties. In addition, SEAT rec- to indicate the pages containing “essential”
ommends resetting the infotainment system information, which is detailed in the corre-
to factory settings to delete all personal data. sponding chapters.
Some details on the drawings may vary from ● Alphabetical index with many terms and
its vehicle and must be interpreted as a synonyms to help you find information.
standard representation.
The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,
backwards) in this manual refer to the travel
Digital instruction manual Related videos
The digital version of the manual can be The operation of some of the vehicle's fea-
found on SEAT's official website: tures can be shown as an instruction video:
● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1 ● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 2
● OR enter the following address in the navi- ● OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website: gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your- http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manuals-offline.html seat/manuals-offline.html
and select your vehicle. choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.
Note
Video instructions are only available in
certain languages.
Table of Contents
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Indications about the technical data . . . . 308
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
SEAT Drive Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine management and emissions control
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Drive assist sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . 211 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Emergency brake assistance system (Front 12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Side Assist with Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 290
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Stabilisation and brake assistance sys- Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 241 Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Parking aid parking and manoeuvring Accessories and modifications to the ve-
(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Parking System Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 298
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . 246
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 301
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Radioelectrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Driving assistance sensors ››› page 210 A Levels control – Tow-start ››› page 52
1 Front radar – Oil ››› page 271
2 Parking aid sensors – Brake fluid ››› page 276
3 Front multifunction camera – Battery ››› page 277
B Bonnet
– Unlocking lever ››› page 269
– Open/close ››› page 269
7
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Driving assistance sensors ››› page 210 A Rear lid D Fuel tank
1 Rear view camera – Opening from outside ››› page 108 – Fuel capacity ››› page 308
2 Parking aid sensors – Emergency opening ››› page 108 – Open/Close cap ››› page 262
3 Rear radars B Towing the vehicle E Action in the event of a puncture
– Towline anchorage ››› page 54 – Anti-puncture kit ››› page 40
– Tow-start ››› page 52 – Wheel change ››› page 43
C Opening and closing
– Doors ››› page 105
– Central locking ››› page 96
– Emergency lock ››› page 106
8
General views of the vehicle
1 Electric windows ››› page 109 Driver information system ››› page 84 16 Front passenger airbag disconnection
2 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 124 8 Hazard warning lights ››› page 119 display ››› page 25
3 Open bonnet lever ››› page 269 9 Infotainment system ››› page 88,
4 Headlight switch ››› page 113 ››› page 145
5 Turn signal and main beam lever 10 Fuses ››› page 55
››› page 115 11 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15
Cruise control ››› page 214 12 Ignition lock ››› page 191
6 Warning lamps ››› page 86 13 Air conditioning ››› page 138
7 Wipers and rear window wiper 14 Starter button ››› page 191
››› page 122 15 Central locking ››› page 96
9
General views of the vehicle
1 Open bonnet lever ››› page 269 7 Headlight switch ››› page 113 16 Fuses ››› page 55
2 Hazard warning lights ››› page 119 8 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 124
3 Infotainment system ››› page 88 9 Electric windows ››› page 109
4 Turn signal and main beam lever 10 Air conditioning ››› page 138
››› page 115 11 Central locking ››› page 96
Cruise control ››› page 214 12 Start button ››› page 191
5 Warning lamps ››› page 86 13 Front passenger airbag disconnection
6 Wipers and rear window wiper display ››› page 25
››› page 122 14 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15
Driver information system ››› page 84 15 Ignition lock ››› page 191
10
General views of the vehicle
Interior view
11
Safety
– Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors – Always reduce your speed as appropriate
Safety first! properly according to your size. for road, traffic and weather conditions.
– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats – When travelling long distances, take breaks
WARNING
always have the headrests in the in-use po- regularly - at least every two hours.
● This manual contains important informa- sition ››› page 127.
tion about the operation of the vehicle, – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
both for the driver and the passengers. The – Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests or stressed.
other sections of the on-board documenta- according to their height.
tion also contain further information that WARNING
– Protect children with appropriate child
you should be aware of for your own safety Driving under the influence of alcohol,
seats and properly applied seat belts
and for the safety of your passengers. drugs, medication or narcotics may result
››› page 28.
● Ensure that the on-board documentation in severe accidents and even loss of life.
is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics
pecially important when lending or selling your passengers also to assume a proper
may significantly alter perception, affect
the vehicle to another person. sitting position ››› page 13.
reaction times and safety while driving,
– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your which could result in the loss of control of
passengers also to fasten their seat belts the vehicle.
Before driving properly ››› page 16.
For your own safety and the safety of your Safety equipment
passengers, always note the following points Factors influencing safety
before every trip: Never put your safety or the safety of your
– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn As a driver, you are responsible for yourself passengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
signals are working properly. and your passengers. dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
12
Safe driving
● head-protection airbags, For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident or sudden
● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats on
braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the
the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,
following positions:
● height-adjustable front headrests,
● rear headrests with in-use position and Valid for all vehicle occupants:
Fig. 3 The correct distance between the driver
non-use position, and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm ● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
● adjustable steering column. (10 inches). at the same level as the top of your head, or
as close as possible to the same level as the
The safety equipment mentioned above top of your head and under no circumstances
works together to provide you and your pas- below eye level. Keep the back of your neck
sengers with the best possible protection in as close as possible to the headrest ››› Fig. 4.
the event of an accident. However, these
● Short people must lower the headrest com-
safety systems can only be effective if you
pletely, even if your head is below its upper
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
edge.
position and use this equipment properly.
● Tall people must raise the headrest com-
Safety is everyone's business!
pletely.
● Always keep your feet in the footwell while
Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions the vehicle is in motion. »
● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly board check translation). If you are sitting and also increase the risk of injury in the
››› page 19. closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot event of an accident.
protect you properly.
The following also applies to the driver:
● Move the seat backrest to an almost up- Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-
right position so that your back rests com- Number of seats
tion
pletely against it.
The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in
● Move the steering wheel so it is at least If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,
the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety
25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.
belt.
››› Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
on both sides, on the outer part, with your ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect
WARNING
arms slightly bent. sitting positions substantially reduce the pro-
Sitting in an incorrect position may in- tective function of seat belts and, therefore,
● The steering wheel must always point to-
crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju-
wards the chest and never towards the face.
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe-
● Move the seat in such a way that you can vring, in case of collision or accident and if
cially heightened when a deploying airbag
step on the pedals with your knees slightly the airbags deploy.
strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed
bent and with a distance between the knees ● Before starting the car, all passengers an incorrect sitting position. The driver is re-
and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in- must be sitting in a correct position and sponsible for all people, particularly children,
ches) ››› Fig. 3. stay like that for the entire journey. This al- inside the vehicle.
● Adjust the height of the seat so that you so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.
can reach the top of the steering wheel. ● The maximum amount of people in the The following list contains examples of incor-
vehicle is the same as the amount of seats rect sitting positions that could be dangerous
● Always keep both feet in the footwell so
with seat belts. for all vehicle occupants.
that you have the vehicle under control at all
times. ● For children, always use a certified pro-
tection system, certified and suited for their
When the vehicle is in motion:
For the passenger, the following applies: weight and height ››› page 28. ● Never stand in the vehicle.
● While driving, always keep your feet in ● Never stand on the seats.
● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
the footwell. Never place them over the
right position so that your back rests com- ● Never kneel on the seats.
seat or the dashboard, for example, or out-
pletely against it. ● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the
side the window. Otherwise the airbag and
● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini- seat belt may offer insufficient protection rear.
mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash- ● Never lean against the dash panel.
14
Safe driving
● Never lie on the rear seats. Steering wheel position adjust- ● Never adjust the steering wheel while the
● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. ment vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust
● Never sit sideways.
the steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion, stop safely and make the proper
● Never lean out of a window. adjustment.
● Never put your feet out of a window. ● The adjusted steering wheel should be
● Never put your feet on the dash panel. facing your chest and not your face so as
not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-
● Never place your feet on the bench or on
tection in the event of an accident.
the backrest of the seat.
● When driving, always hold the steering
● Never travel in a footwell. wheel with both hands on the outside of the
● Never sit on the armrests. ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
to reduce injuries when the driver's front
● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
airbag deploys.
● Never travel in the luggage compartment. Fig. 5 Lever in the lower left side of the steering
column. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position or in any other manner
WARNING (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In
Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and
Sitting in an incorrect position increases only when the vehicle is stationary. such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,
the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the you may sustain injuries to your arms,
event of accidents and sudden braking or ● Pull the ››› Fig. 5 1 lever down, move the hands and head.
manoeuvres. steering wheel to the desired position and lift
● All occupants must sit correctly during the lever back up until it locks.
the journey and wear the seat belt correct-
ly. WARNING Pedal area
● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit- Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or ment function and an incorrect adjustment Pedals
are not at a proper distance of the airbag of the steering wheel can result in severe or
risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries, fatal injury. – Ensure that you can always press the ac-
especially if the airbags deploy and strike ● After adjusting the steering column, push
celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim-
them. the lever ››› Fig. 5 1 firmly upwards to en- paired to the floor.
sure the steering wheel does not acciden- – Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
tally change position while driving. paired to their initial positions. »
15
Safety
status is displayed for approximately 30 sec- gy released in a collision. Taken together, all – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened
onds. these features reduce the releasing kinetic at all times and are not damaged.
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat WARNING
The protective function of seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
around the corner".
belts all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat optimal protection from seat belts can be
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown achieved only if you use them properly.
that wearing seat belts is an effective means ● Never allow two passengers (even chil-
of substantially reducing the risk of injury and dren) to share the same seat belt.
improving the chances of survival when in- ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-
volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
properly worn seat belts improve the protec- ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or
tion provided by airbags in the event of an fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt etc.) because this can cause injuries.
is required by law in most countries. ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged
Although your vehicle is equipped with air- or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will bags, the seat belts must be fastened and ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
not be thrown forward in the event of sudden worn. The front airbags, for example, are only in any other incorrect position.
braking.
triggered in some cases of head-on collision. ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as
The front airbags will not be triggered during an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-
in the proper position. They also help prevent
sions, overturns or accidents in which the air- ducing their capacity to protect.
uncontrolled movements that may result in
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
is not exceeded. be blocked with paper or other objects, as
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent. this can prevent the latch plate from en-
gaging securely.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts Important safety instructions for ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of
the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the use of seat belts or similar items to alter the position of the
belt webbing.
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
– Always wear the seat belt as described in ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
this section. the connections, belt retractors or parts of »
17
Safety
the buckle could cause severe injuries in amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
the event of an accident. Therefore, you be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
must check the condition of all seat belts Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
at regular intervals. 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
● Seat belts which have been worn in an ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
accident and have been stretched must be (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- even higher.
newal may be necessary even if there is no
apparent damage. The belt anchorage Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
should also be checked. not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver speed their vehicle was travelling just before
moved or modified in any way. who is wearing a seat belt. the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
The effects of the laws of physics in the case collisions.
the retractors may not work properly.
of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-
body in a collision are so great that it is not
ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In
Head-on collisions and the laws of both the vehicle and its passengers.
a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are
physics The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on thrown forward and will make violent contact
the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-
the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher screen or whatever else is in the way
they are, the more energy there is to be “ab- ››› Fig. 8.
sorbed” in the event of an accident.
It is also important for rear passengers to
The most significant factor, however, is the wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles wise be thrown forward violently through the
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
gy is multiplied by four. danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 9.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown our example do not have their seat belts fas-
forward violently. tened, in the event of a collision the entire
18
Seat belts
How to properly adjust your Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- WARNING
cupants in the position that most protects
seat belt them in the event of an accident or sudden
● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-
tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-
braking ››› .
right position and the seat belt is worn cor-
Fastening and unfastening the seat rectly, according to your size.
belt Fastening the seat belt
● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-
Fasten your seat belt before each trip. cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
● Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly
den braking.
››› page 13.
● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,
● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
can cause severe injuries if the belt moves
an upright position ››› . from hard areas of the body to soft areas
● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- (e.g. the stomach).
bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do
not twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .
● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the
corresponding seat ››› Fig. 10.
Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt
into the buckle. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
19
Safety
Correct seat belt position belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op- WARNING
timum position to ensure the airbag provides
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can
the maximum protection. The seat belt must
cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of
therefore always be worn and the webbing
an accident.
correctly positioned.
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe on the centre of the shoulder, never across
or even fatal injuries ››› page 13, Correct sit- the neck or the arm.
ting position of vehicle occupants. ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ably on the torso
on the centre of the shoulder, never across ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie
the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind across the pelvis, never across the stom-
the shoulder. ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-
Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and headrest posi-
fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if
tions, viewed from front and the side. ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
necessary to take up any slack.
the pelvis, never across the stomach.
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the
● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- seat belt must lie as low as possible over
bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”
any slack. the stomach››› Fig. 13.
● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-
In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt
tened.
must lie evenly across the chest and as low
as possible over the pelvis, never across the ● Once the seat belt is positioned correct-
stomach and must be worn properly at all ly, don't pull it away from your body with
times during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 13. your hand.
● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or
Adapting the position of the belt webbing fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.
to your size ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings
Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.
The position of the seat belt can be adapted or similar instruments to alter the position
by adjusting the height of the front seats. of the belt webbing.
Seat belts offer their maximum protection in
the event of an accident and reduce the risk
of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when Note
they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if If your physical constitution prevents you
the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat from maintaining the correct position of the
20
Seat belts
belt webbing, contact a specialised work- of the system are scrapped. Specialised ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-
shop for help with any special devices to workshops are familiar with these regula- tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.
ensure the optimum protection of the seat tions, which are also available to you. ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking belts, including the removal and refitting of
your car in for technical service. system parts in conjunction with other re-
Maintenance and disposal of seat pair work, must be performed by a special-
ised workshop only.
belt tensioners
Seat belt tensioners ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be
The belt tensioners are components of the
changed if they have been activated.
seat belts that are installed in the seats of
How the seat belt tensioner works
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
The seat belts for the front seats and the side ers or remove and install parts of the system For the sake of the environment
rear seats1) are equipped with belt tensioners. when performing other repair work, the seat Airbag modules and belt tensioners may
belt may be damaged. The consequence contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-
The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, may be that, in the event of an accident, the quirements for their disposal.
although only in severe head-on, lateral and belt tensioners function incorrectly or may
rear-end collisions. This retracts and tightens not function at all.
the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of
the occupants. So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
The belt pre-tensioners work in combination do not cause any injuries or environmental
with the airbag system. In case of overturn, pollution, regulations, which are known to the
the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the specialised workshops, must be observed.
head airbags are deployed.
WARNING
Note
● Improper use or repairs not carried out by
● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners
is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. may fail to trigger or may trigger in the
● The relevant safety requirements must be wrong circumstances.
observed when the vehicle or components
1) Depending on version/market.
21
Safety
seat belt and to sit correctly? This way, the front airbags can completely ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- erly ››› page 16.
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best mum protection.
protection, the seat belt must always be worn
The most important factors for triggering the
properly and the correct sitting position must Description of the airbag system
airbag are the type of accident, the angle of
be assumed.
impact and the vehicle speed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat The airbag system offers additional protec-
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- tion for the occupants in combination with the
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration seat belts.
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
rate resulting from the collision and detected
mind that the airbag system can only work
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration The airbag system comprises the follow-
effectively when the vehicle occupants are
occurring during the collision and measured ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
by the control unit remains below the speci-
adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it ● Electronic control unit
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
is most important to properly wear the seat ● Front airbags for driver and passenger
head-protection airbags will not be triggered.
belts at all times, not only because this is re-
Take into account that the visible damage in ● Side airbags
quired by law in most countries, but also for
a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter
your safety ››› page 16, The whys and ● Head airbag
how serious, is not a determining factor for
wherefores of seat belts. ● Airbag control lamp on the instrument
the airbags to have been triggered.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so panel ››› page 24
if you are not properly seated when the air- WARNING ● Key-operated switch for front passenger
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- airbag
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle suming an incorrect sitting position can ● Control lamp for disabled/enabled status
occupants assume a correct sitting position lead to critical or fatal injuries. of the front passenger airbag.
while travelling.
● All vehicle occupants, including children,
Sharp braking before an accident may cause who are not properly belted can sustain
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-
22
Airbag system
The airbag system operation is monitored system may fail to trigger, or not trigger The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- correctly. tory and activates the respective restraint
luminate for a few seconds every time the system.
ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
Airbag activation fined reference value in the control unit the
There is a fault in the system if the control
airbags will not be triggered, even though the
lamp :
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within accident may cause extensive damage to the
● does not light up when the ignition is thousands of a second, to provide additional car.
switched on ››› page 24, protection in the event of an accident. A fine
● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is dust may develop when the airbag deploys. The following airbags are triggered in seri-
switched on, This is normal and it is not an indication of fire ous head-on collisions:
● turns off and then lights up again after the
in the vehicle. ● Driver airbag.
ignition is switched on, The airbag system is only ready to function ● Front passenger front airbag
● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is when the ignition is on.
moving. In special accidents instances, several air- The following airbags are triggered in seri-
bags may activate at the same time. ous side-on collisions:
The airbag system is not triggered if: ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
● the ignition is switched off sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- dent.
● there is a minor frontal collision over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
Operation of the airbags checked immediately by a specialised work- tions and instructions to avoid damage to
shop. the vehicle or harm to the occupants.
The driver's front airbag is housed in the Activate and deactivate front pas- SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the
steering wheel and that of the front passen- rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the
senger front airbag
ger, on the instrument panel . Airbags are front passenger airbag.
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
When the front passenger airbag is deacti-
The airbag covers fold open and remain at- vated, this means that only the front passen-
tached to the steering wheel ››› Fig. 14 and ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other
the dash panel ››› Fig. 15when the driver and airbags in the vehicle remain activated.
front passenger airbags, respectively, are
triggered. Deactivate and activate the front passen-
ger front airbag
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants ad- ● Switch the ignition off.
ditional protection for the head and chest in ● Open the door on the front passenger side.
the event of a severe frontal collision ››› .
Fig. 16 Switch for activating and deactivating ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
Their special design allows the controlled es- the front passenger airbag. deactivating the front passenger airbag
cape of the propellant gas when an occu- ››› Fig. 16. About 3/4 of the key should enter;
pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the this is as far as it will go.
head and chest are protected by the airbag. ● Turn the key gently to change its position to
After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi- (deactivate) or to (activate). If you have
ciently to allow visibility. difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the
key as far as it will go.
WARNING
● Close the front passenger door.
● The deployment space between the front
● When deactivating the airbag, switch the
passengers and the airbags must not in
any case be occupied by other passenger, ignition on and check that the control lamp
pets and objects. with the lettering re-
mains lit in the middle of the dash panel
● The airbags provide protection for just Fig. 17 Central part of the dashboard: control
one accident; replace them once they have lamp for the deactivation of the front passen- ››› Fig. 17.
deployed. ger front airbag. ● When reactivating the airbag, check that
● It is also important not to attach any ob- when the ignition is switched on, the
Deactivate the front passenger front airbag control lamp does not light up and the
jects such as cup holders or telephone
only if you have to use a rear-facing child lamp lights up or 60 seconds and then turns
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
seat in the front passenger seat. off. »
25
Safety
WARNING WARNING
● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
disabling or switching on the airbag. forward, or are not seated correctly while
● Always switch off the ignition before dis- the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater
abling the front passenger airbag! Failure risk of injury if the side airbag system is
to do so could result in a fault in the airbag triggered in an accident.
deactivation system. ● In order for the side airbags to provide
● Never leave the key in the airbag disa- their maximum protection, the prescribed
bling switch as it could get damaged or en- sitting position must always be maintained
able or disable the airbag during driving. with seat belts fastened while travelling.
Fig. 19 Illustration of completely inflated side ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will
● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, airbag on left side of vehicle.
reactivate it as soon as possible so that it not work if the sensors do not correctly
can fulfil its protective function. measure the pressure increase on the inte-
The side airbags are located in the driver's
rior of the doors, due to air escaping
seat and front passenger seat backrests
through the areas with holes or openings in
››› Fig. 18. the door panel.
Side airbags The locations are identified by the text “AIR- ● Never drive if the interior door panels
BAG” in the upper region of the backrests. have been removed or if the panels have
not been correctly fitted.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-
bag system provides additional protection for ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-
the upper body in the event of a severe side ers in the door panels have been removed,
collision ››› . unless the holes left by the loudspeakers
have been closed properly.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the ● Always check that the openings are
risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the closed or covered if loudspeakers or other
body facing the impact. In addition to their equipment are fitted inside the door pan-
normal protection, the seat belts also hold els.
the passengers in the event of a side collision; ● Occupants of the outer seats must never
Fig. 18 Side airbag in driver's seat. this is how these airbags provide maximum carry any objects or pets in the deploy-
protection. ment space between them and the airbags,
or allow children or other passengers to
travel in this position. It is also important
not to attach any accessories (such as cup
26
Airbag system
holders) to the doors. This would impair the head-protection airbags The head-protection airbags reduce the risk
protection offered by the side airbags. of injury to passengers in the front and rear
side seats facing the impact.
● The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
WARNING
pockets. ● In order for the head-protection airbags
● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, to provide their maximum protection, the
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- prescribed sitting position must always be
ster because the system may be damaged. maintained with seat belts fastened while
In this case, the side airbags would not be travelling.
triggered. ● For safety reasons, the head-protection
● Under no circumstances should protec- airbag must be disabled in those vehicles
tive covers be fitted over seats with side Fig. 20 Location and deployment area of the fitted with a screen dividing the interior of
airbags unless the covers have been ap- head-protection airbag. the vehicle. See your technical service to
proved for use in your vehicle. Because the make this adjustment.
airbag deploys from the side of the back- The head-protection airbags are located on ● There must be no other persons, animals
rest, the use of conventional seat covers both sides in the interior above the doors or objects between the occupants of the
would obstruct the side airbag, seriously ››› Fig. 20 and are identified with the text outer seats and the deployment space of
reducing the airbag's effectiveness. “AIRBAG”. the head-protection airbags so that the
● Any damage to the original seat uphols- In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- head-protection airbag can deploy com-
tery or around the seams of the side airbag pletely without restriction and provide the
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
units must be repaired immediately by a greatest possible protection. Therefore,
occupants additional protection for the head
specialised workshop. sun blinds which have not been expressly
and upper body in the event of a severe side
approved for use in your vehicle may not be
● The airbags provide protection for just collision ››› .
attached to the side windows.
one accident; replace them once they have
The area framed in red is covered by the ● The built-in coat hooks should be used
deployed.
head-protection airbag when it is deployed only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
● Any work on the side airbag system or re-
››› Fig. 20 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
moval and installation of the airbag com-
jects should never be placed or mounted in pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on
ponents for other repairs (such as removal
this area ››› . coat hangers.
of the front seat) should only be performed
● The airbags provide protection for just
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, In the event of a side collision the head-pro-
faults may occur during the airbag system tection airbag is triggered on the impact side one accident; replace them once they have
operation. of the vehicle.
deployed. »
27
Safety
● Any work on the head-protection airbag Transporting children These systems have been especially de-
signed and approved, complying with the
system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such safely ECE-R44. regulation.
as removal of the roof lining) should only SEAT recommends securing the child seats
be performed by a specialised workshop.
Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- Child safety shown on the website as described below:
bag system operation. ● Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-
● The side and head airbags are managed Introduction el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket
through sensors located in the interior of (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).
the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- For safety reasons, as we have learned from
● Child seats in the direction of travel (group
ation of the side and head-protection air- accident statistics, we recommend that chil-
1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX
bags neither the doors nor the door panels dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
DUO Plus).
should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting seats. Depending on their age, height and
loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- weight, children travelling in rear seats must ● Child seats directed towards the front of
aged, the airbag system may not work cor- use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- the vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX
rectly. All work carried out on the front door sons, the child seat should be installed in the (RÖMER KIDFIX XP©).
must be done in a specialised workshop. rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or ● Child seats directed towards the front of
in the centre back seat. the vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX
The physical laws involved and the forces (TATAKI MAXI PLUS©).
acting in a collision apply also to children
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
››› page 18. But unlike adults, children do not observe any statutory requirements when in-
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
tures. This means that children are subject to
and note ››› page 30.
a greater risk of injury.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
ways use special child restraint systems
gether with the on-board documentation.
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see
www.seat.com).
28
Transporting children safely
Child seats group classification Child seats that have been tested and ap- universal approval, requires safety devices to
proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129 lock the child seat, which require additional
standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-
test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle proval include a list of vehicle models for
with the test number below it). which they can be installed.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
observe any statutory requirements when in- requires a dynamic test of the child seat for
stalling and using child seats. each vehicle model separately. Child seats
with vehicle-specific approval also include a
We recommend you to always include the list of vehicle models for which they can be
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual installed.
together with the on-board documentation.
● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must
Fig. 21 Examples of child seats. SEAT recommends you use child seats from meet the requirements set out in the ECE-
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These R129 standard in relation to installation and
Use only child seats that are officially ap- child seats have been designed and tested safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you
proved and suitable for the child. for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-
These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or child seat for your model and age group at cle.
ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco- SEAT dealers.
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
Child seats by approval category
Child seats by weight group Child seats may have the approval category
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific
ries: (all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-
Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).
Age group Weight of the child ● Universal: child seats with universal appro-
Group 0 Up to 10 kg val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no
need to consult any list of models. In the case
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child
Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg
seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether
belt.
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg in addition to the standard requirements of
29
Safety
Fitting and using child seats Warnings about fitting a child seat bracket, it should never be installed in the
Take the following general warnings into ac- central rear seat as the ground clearance is
count if you are going to fit a child seat. They lower than in other places and the support
are valid for all child seats regardless of their bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
attachment system. ciently stable.
● When fitting a child seat on the front pas-
● Please read and follow the child seat man- senger seat, the seat must be moved back-
ufacturer's operating instructions. wards as far as possible and placed in the
● The child seat should preferably be fitted to highest position. The backrest must also be
the rear seat behind the front passenger seat put in a vertical position1).
Fig. 22 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun
so that the child can exit the vehicle on the
visor pavement side. Important information about the front pas-
● Set the height of the seat belt such that it senger front airbag
adapts to the child seat naturally, without A sticker with important information about the
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt passenger airbag is located on the passeng-
height regulator must be used with rear-fac- er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side
ing child seats. door frame ››› Fig. 22.
● To correctly use a child seat in the back, Read and always observe the safety informa-
the front backrest must be adjusted so that tion included in the following chapters:
there is no contact with the child seat in the
back in the case that it goes opposite to the ● Safety distance with respect to the passen-
direction of the car. In the case of front facing ger airbag ››› page 22.
restraint systems, the front backrest must be ● Objects between the passenger and the
adjusted so that there is no contact with the passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags
child's feet. on page 25.
Fig. 23 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the
passenger side door ● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
led, in which the method of attachment to the The passenger side front airbag, when ena-
car is through the seat belt and support bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or ● For those vehicles that do not include a Attachment systems overview
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, ● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-
should always travel on the rear seat. the vehicle must be taken to a technical ment system allowing quick and safe attach-
Therefore we strongly recommend you to service. Do not forget to reconnect the air- ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-
bag when an adult wants to sit in the front tachment establishes a rigid connection be-
transport children on the rear seats. This is
passenger seat. tween the child seat and the car body.
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- ● Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,
bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 25.
to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- called connectors. These connectors are fit-
When transporting children, use a child seat
ling. In an accident, the child could be flung ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
suitable for the age and size of each child
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal between the seat cushion and the backrest
››› page 29. injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-
cle occupants. FIX attachment systems are used mainly in
WARNING
● Never leave a child alone in the child seat Europe ››› page 32. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- tachment may have to be supplemented with
or in the vehicle.
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
accident increases. ● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-
child seat, as this could cause injuries to
● An inflating front passenger airbag can ever possible, it is preferable to attach the
the abdominal and neck areas during a
strike the rear-facing child seat and project sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci- child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than
it with great force against the door, the roof dent. attaching them with an automatic three-point
or the backrest. seat belt ››› page 35.
● When a child seat is mounted in the rear
● Never install a child seat facing back-
seats, the door child-proof lock should be Additional attachment:
wards on the front passenger seat unless activated ››› page 107.
the front passenger front airbag has been ● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided
disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to
over the back of the rear seat and attached
the child! However, if necessary, the front
to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points
passenger front airbag must be deactiva- Attachment systems
are located at the back of the rear seat back-
ted ››› page 25. If the passenger seat has a
height adjustment option, move it to the Depending on the country, different attach- rest on the boot side ››› page 34. The rings
highest, most upright position. If you have a ment systems are used for safely installing for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked
fixed seat, do not install any child restraint child seats. with an anchor symbol.
system in this location. ● Support bracket: some child seats rest on
the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.
The support bracket prevents the child seat »
31
Safety
from tipping forward in the event of impact. Recommended systems for attaching ● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
Child seats fitted with a support bracket child seats FIX and Top Tether.
should only be used in the passenger seat SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of follows: WARNING
this type of seat you should also consult the Incorrect use of the support bracket can
list of approved vehicles for this assembly, ● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- cause serious or fatal injury.
available in the instructions for child restraint site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support
● Make sure the support bracket is correct-
systems. bracket or i-Size.
ly and safely installed.
Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether system
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each backrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 24.
and safely on the rear side seats with the rear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are The Top Tether rings are located on the rear
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether system. secured to the seat frame and, in others, they part of the rear seat backrests (behind the
are secured to the rear floor. The “ISOFIX” backrest or in the luggage compartment)
rings are located between the rear seat ››› page 34.
32
Transporting children safely
Age group Height classification Front passenger seat Side rear seats Middle rear bench seat
Group 0: up to 10 kg E X IL-SU X
E X X
C X X
D X X
C X X
B1 X X
A X X
Height classification: The height classification indication is equivalent to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In the case of child seats with universal or semi-
universal approval, the height classification is shown on the ECE approval label. The height classification is specified on each child seat.
X: Vehicle seat unsuitable for fitting this group of child seat.
IL-SU: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting an ISOFIX child seat with semi-universal approval. The vehicle list provided by the child seat manufacturer must be consulted.
IUF: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting an ISOFIX child seat with universal approval.
i-U: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward- or rear-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval.
Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward- or rear-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval. Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward-facing i-Size child seat with
universal approval. »
33
Safety
Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i- ● Ensure that the child seat is correctly se-
Size” system cured to the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether secur-
You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- ing rings.
turer's instructions.
34
Transporting children safely
Securing the retainer strap ● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- WARNING
● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to facturer's instructions.
An undue installation of the safety seat will
deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining increase the risk of injury in the event of a
strap. Releasing the retaining strap
crash.
● Place the belt under the headrest of the ● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in
back seat ››› Fig. 26 (depending on the in- er's instructions. the luggage compartment.
structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the ● Push the lock and release it from the an- ● Never secure or tie luggage or other
headrest if necessary). choring support. items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or
● Slide the strap and secure it properly with the upper ones (Top Tether).
the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 27.
If you want to fit a universal approval catego- cle. You will find any necessary information bel. The following table shows the different
ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must on the child seat’s orange ECE approval la- fitting options. »
check that the seat is approved for your vehi-
35
Safety
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg X U U
Rear-facing From 9 to 18 kg X U U
Group 1
Forward-facing From 9 to 18 kg U X U
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg U X U
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg U X U
U: universal.
X: vehicle seat unsuitable for fitting this group of child seat.
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt WARNING Fitting a child seat to the middle
● Set the height of the seat belt such that it
When travelling, children must be secured seat of the rear bench using the
adapts to the child seat naturally, without in the vehicle with a restraint system suita- seat belt
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt ble for age, weight and size.
height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ● Read and always observe information
ing child seats. and warnings concerning the use of child
● Put the seat belt in place and pass it seats ››› page 30.
through the child seat according to the in-
structions of the child seat manufacturer.
● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle
until you hear the engagement click.
36
Transporting children safely
37
Emergencies
39
Emergencies
Vehicle tool kit WARNING Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws
or nails, from the tyre.
When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set
and spare wheel are loose in the interior After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
they can be violently thrown in case of a you must again check the tyre pressure
sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe- about 10 minutes after starting the engine.
cially in accidents, causing serious injury.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if the
● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre
vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-
mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- miliar with the procedure and you have the
rary spare wheel are safely secured in the
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
luggage compartment.
should seek professional assistance.
40
Self-help
● Ensure the ground on which you park is ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking Anti-puncture kit contents
flat and solid. and fast cornering.
● All passengers and particularly children ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
must keep a safe distance from the work speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
area. the tyre.
● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users. For the sake of the environment
● Use the tyre mobility system only if you
Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-
are familiar with the necessary procedures. ing any legal requirements.
Otherwise, you should seek professional
assistance.
● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-
Note
porary emergency use only until you can A new bottle of sealant can be purchased
reach the nearest specialised workshop. at SEAT dealerships.
● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre Fig. 31 Standard representation: anti-punc-
mobility set as soon as possible. Note ture kit contents.
● The sealant is a health hazard and must Take into account the separate instruction The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
be cleaned immediately if it comes into manual of the tyre mobility system’s manu- the floor covering in the luggage compart-
contact with the skin. facturer. ment. It includes the following components
● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of
››› Fig. 31:
the reach of small children.
● Always stop the engine, apply the hand 1 Valve insert remover
brake and put it in gear when using a man- 2 A sticker to be adhered to the instrument
ual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of cluster, within the driver's visual field, to
involuntary movement of the vehicle. remind that the maximum advisable
speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
WARNING 3 Filler tube with cap
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the 4 Air compressor
same performance properties as a conven-
5 ON/OFF switch
tional tyre.
● Never drive faster than 80 km/h
6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated
(50 mph). in the inflator tube). »
41
Emergencies
7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- ● Remove the bottle from the valve. ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
toring system (it can also be integrated in ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
the inflator tube). ing the tool ››› Fig. 31 1 . ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
8 Tube for inflating tyres 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
9 12 volt connector Inflating the tyre 80 km/h (50 mph).
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube ● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 31 2 to the instru-
10 Bottle of sealant
››› Fig. 31 8 into the tyre valve. ment cluster, within the driver's visual field.
11 Spare tyre valve
● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at ››› Fig. 31 6 . ››› page 43.
the lower end for a valve insert. The valve in- ● Start the engine and leave it running.
sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this WARNING
● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 31 9 into the
way. This also applies to its replacement part When inflating the wheel, the air compres-
11 . vehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 138.
sor and the inflator tube may become hot.
● Turn the air compressor on with the
● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 31 5 .
● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube
Sealing and inflating a tyre ● Keep the air compressor running until it rea-
or hot air compressor on flammable mate-
ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). rial.
Sealing the tyre A maximum of 8 minutes.
● Allow them to cool before storing the de-
● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use ● Disconnect the air compressor. vice.
the ››› Fig. 31 1 tool to remove the insert. ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
Place it on a clean surface. unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
››› Fig. 31 10 .
distributed throughout the tyre. good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 31 3 into the tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break au- valve.
tomatically. CAUTION
● Repeat the inflation process.
● Remove the lid from the filling tube Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
● If the indicated pressure still cannot be
››› Fig. 313 and screw the open end of the mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid
tube into the tyre valve. reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
overheating! Before switching on the air
and request assistance from an authorised compressor again, let it cool for several mi-
● With the bottle upside down, empty all of
technician. nutes.
the contents into the tyre.
42
Self-help
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: ● Automatic transmission: Move the selector
lever to position P. Fig. 32 Correct positioning of the central
● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value wheel trim for steel rims.
again. ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle. The central trims must be removed for access
● Carefully resume your journey until you
reach the nearest specialised workshop with- ● Make sure that the vehicle tool kit to the wheel nuts.
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). ››› page 40 and the spare wheel
● Have the damaged tyre replaced.
››› page 288 are ready. Removing
● Observe the applicable legislation for each ● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools
WARNING country (reflective vest, warning triangles, ››› page 40) to one of the recesses of the
etc.). central wheel trim and remove it.
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious in- ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and
jury. wait in a safe place (for instance behind the Fitting
● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- roadside crash barrier). ● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The
sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. bottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge should
WARNING align with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 32 1 .
● Seek specialist assistance.
● Always observe the above steps and pro- ● Press the central trim firmly until it locks in
tect yourself and other road users. with an audible click. »
● If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car
with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-
cle from moving.
43
Emergencies
The wheel covers must be removed for ac- Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt
cess to the wheel nuts. Fig. 34 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.
● Remove the wheel cover or the cap.
44
Self-help
Make a note of the code number of the an- Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-
ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe cially matched during construction. There-
place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct
new adapter, you can obtain it from the wheel nuts with the right length and heads
SEAT Official Service, indicating the code must be used. This ensures that wheels are
number. fitted securely and that the brake system
functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not even
Loosening wheel nuts use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same
Fig. 37 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and the
model.
correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking
bolt 2 or 3 . In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft
locking bolt must be threaded onto positions
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the ››› Fig. 37 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po-
car to loosen the wheel nuts. sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be
Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn possible to mount the hubcap.
before raising the vehicle with the jack.
WARNING
If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push
on the end of the wheel wrench with your If the wheel nuts are not properly tight-
foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and ened, they could come loose while driving
and cause an accident, serious injury and
Fig. 36 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts. take care not to slip during this operation.
loss of vehicle control.
● Use only wheel nuts which correspond to
Loosening wheel nuts
the rim in question.
● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go
● Never use different wheel nuts.
››› Fig. 36.
● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,
● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the
free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-
bolt approximately one turn anticlock- sible to screw them easily.
wise ››› .
● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only
use the wheel wrench that came with the
car from the factory. »
45
Emergencies
CAUTION ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack. in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre
● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on
The vehicle must not be raised on the
wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di- tyres with directional tread. Always observe
crossbar. Place the jack only at the support
agonal pairs (not in a circle). the indicated direction of rotation in order to
points provided on the strut and align it.
guarantee optimum grip and help avoid
Otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged. ● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
››› page 44.
If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction
The wheel nuts should be clean and turn of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the
Removing and installing a wheel easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- of particular importance when the road sur-
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-
nuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
ting the wheel. sible or remount it with the correct direction
When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may of rotation.
hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea- Tightening torque of the wheel nuts
son, please take care and get a second per-
The recommended tightening torque for
son to assist you.
wheel nuts for steel and alloy wheels is Works after changing a wheel
120 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the
Taking off the wheel ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.
tightening torque checked immediately with a
● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box torque wrench that is working perfectly. ● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .
spanner and place them on a clean surface.
Before checking tightening torque, have any ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
● Take off the wheel. rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re- tion.
placed and clean the wheel hub threads. ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
Putting on the spare wheel
Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-
Check the direction of rotation of the tyre the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have gage compartment ››› page 130.
››› page 47. been tightened to the prescribed torque, they ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
● Place the spare wheel or temporary spare
could come loose while driving. ted tyre as soon as possible.
wheel into position. ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-
● Screw on the wheel nuts in position and tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory
tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
Tyres with directional tread pattern ››› page 287. »
● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts Tyres with directional tread pattern have
use the corresponding adaptor. been designed to operate best when rotating
47
Emergencies
● Have the tightening torque of the wheel ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-
nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor- wards briefly ››› page 122 4 .
que wrench ››› page 47. Meanwhile, drive
carefully. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.
Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-
● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-
possible.
tion.
Note
Changing the windscreen ● The windscreen wiper arms can be
moved to the service position only when
wiper blades the bonnet is properly closed.
Fig. 42 Changing the rear wiper blade
● You can also use the service position, for The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
Wiper service position example, if you want to fix a cover over the standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.
ice. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of
the water as it is wiped across the windscreen
will be louder.
Changing the wiper rear wiper Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-
blades ularly. If the wipers scrape across the
glass, they should be changed if they are
damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .
If this does not produce the desired results,
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper
Fig. 40 Wipers in service position. arms might be incorrect. They should be
checked by a specialised workshop and cor-
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. rected if necessary.
The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- Damaged windscreen wiper blades should
ers are in service position ››› Fig. 40. be replaced immediately. These are availa-
ble from qualified workshops.
● Close the bonnet ››› page 268.
Fig. 41 Changing the windscreen wiper blades
● Switch the ignition on and off.
48
Self-help
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper ● Hold down the release button 1 while gen- CAUTION
arms tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrow
● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the
B .
● Place the windscreen wipers in the service wiper arms, only leave them in the service
position ››› page 48. ● Insert a new blade of the same length and position.
● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-
● Before driving, always lower the wiper
fastening point. rection to the arrow B and hook into place
arms.
button 1 .
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades ● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.
● Lift and fold the wiper arm. ● In icy conditions, always check that the otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- the positive terminals are connected.
● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 42 (arrow A ). fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it ● The discharged battery must be properly
may help to leave the vehicle parked with connected to the on-board network.
the wipers in service position ››› page 48.
49
Emergencies
Jump start: description 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
the positive + terminal of the vehicle flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes
with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 43. until the engine is running.
3. Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- Removing the jump leads
hicle providing assistance B . 9. Before you remove the jump leads,
4a. In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: switch off the dipped beam headlights if
connect one end of the black jump lead they are switched on.
to the negative terminal – of the vehicle 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated
providing the current B ››› Fig. 43. rear window in the vehicle with the flat
4b. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: battery. This helps minimise voltage
connect one end of the black jump lead peaks which are generated when the
Fig. 43 Diagram of connections for vehicles leads are disconnected.
X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-
without Start Stop system
id piece of metal in the engine block, or 11. When the engine is running, disconnect
to the engine block itself ››› Fig. 44. the leads in reverse order to the details
5. Connect the other end of the black jump given above.
lead X to a solid metal component bol-
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
ted to the engine block or to the engine
metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-
block itself of the vehicle with the flat
minals.
battery. Do not connect it to a point near
the battery A . If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
6. Position the leads in such a way that onds, switch off the starter and try again after
they cannot come into contact with any about 1 minute.
moving parts in the engine compart-
Fig. 44 Diagram of connections for vehicles ment. WARNING
with Start Stop system ● Please note the safety warnings referring
Starting to working in the engine compartment
Jump lead terminal connections ››› page 268.
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles boosting battery and let it run at idling ● The battery providing assistance must
››› . speed. have the same voltage as the flat battery
50
Self-help
(12V) and approximately the same capaci- Note Keyless Access system, the steering wheel
ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- could lock ››› .
The vehicles must not touch each other,
ply could result in an explosion.
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
● Never use jump leads when one of the
WARNING
the positive terminals are connected.
batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! A vehicle with no power should never be
Even after the battery has thawed, battery towed.
acid could leak and cause chemical burns. ● When towing, never remove the ignition
If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Tow start and towing key or disconnect the ignition with the start
● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of
rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- Introduction the steering column could suddenly be-
plosion. Failure to comply could result in an come blocked and it would be impossible
explosion. Tow-starting means starting the engine of to steer the vehicle. This could cause an
● Observe the instructions provided by the accident, serious injury and loss of control
the vehicle while another pulls it.
manufacturer of the jump leads. of the vehicle.
Towing means one vehicle pulling another ● If during towing the vehicle runs out of
● Do not connect the negative cable from
that is not roadworthy. power, stop towing immediately and re-
the other vehicle directly to the negative
terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- Always consider the legal provisions relating quest the assistance of specialist person-
ted from the battery could be ignited by to tow-starting and towing. nel.
sparks. Danger of explosion.
For technical reasons, towing a vehicle
● Never attach the negative cable to fuel WARNING
with a discharged battery is not allowed.
system components or the brake lines in The jump start should be used instead Vehicle handling and braking capacity
the other vehicle.
››› page 49. change considerably during towing. Please
● The non-insulated parts of the battery observe the following instructions to mini-
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access mise the risk of serious accidents and in-
jump lead attached to the positive battery system, towing is only allowed with the igni- jury:
terminal must not touch metal parts of the tion on!
● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is – You should depress the brake much
● Position the leads in such a way that they towed with the engine switched off and the harder as the brake servo does not op-
cannot come into contact with any moving ignition connected. Depending on the battery erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid
parts in the engine compartment. charge status, the drop in voltage may be so crashing into the towing vehicle.
● Do not lean on the batteries. This could large, even after just a few minutes, that no – More strength is required at the steer-
result in chemical burns. electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. ing wheel as the power steering does »
the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the
51
Emergencies
not operate when the engine is switch- electronic lock of the steering column be re- Towing instructions
ed off. leased if they are activated.
● As the driver of the towing vehicle: ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the Towing requires some expertise and experi-
engine control units may not operate correct- ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both
– Accelerate with particular care and
ly. drivers should be familiar with the difficulties
caution.
involved in towing. For this reason, inexper-
– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. ienced drivers should abstain from towing.
However, if the vehicle must absolutely be
– Brake earlier than usual and more tow-started (in the case of manual gear- During towing, it should be ensured that no
smoothly. boxes): impermissible tractive forces or shocks are
● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. generated. When towing on an unpaved
CAUTION road, there is always a risk of overloading and
● Keep the clutch pressed down.
● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam- damaging the anchorage points.
● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-
ple the paint, remove and replace the lid During towing, the towing vehicle can signal
and towing eye carefully.
ing lights of both vehicles.
the change of direction even with the hazard
● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic
● Once both vehicles are moving, release the
warning lights turned on. To do so, at the
converter and damage it during towing. clutch.
same time, the turn signal lever must be oper-
● Once the engine starts, press the clutch ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the
and disengage the gear to avoid colliding hazard warning lights will go off. When the
with the towing vehicle. turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-
Instructions for tow-starting
tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-
Vehicle's should not generally be tow- CAUTION matically reactivated.
started. The jump start should be used in- ● When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could
stead ››› page 49. enter the catalytic converter and damage Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
it. ● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is
For technical reasons, towing the following
● Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m not blocked, and the electronic parking brake
vehicles is not allowed:
in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam- may be deactivated and the turn signals and
● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. age to the catalytic converter. wash/wipe operated.
● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- ● More strength is required at the steering
cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access wheel as the power steering does not oper-
locking and ignition system the steering re- ate when the engine is switched off.
mains locked and the electronic parking
brake cannot be deactivated nor can the
52
Self-help
● You should depress the brake much harder When the vehicle has to be towed: ● When, for example, after an accident, the
as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid Check whether the vehicle may be towed smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering
hitting the towing vehicle. operation cannot be guaranteed.
››› page 53, Cases where towing the vehi-
● Bear in mind the information and instruc- cle is not permitted.
tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed. When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:
The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
● Observe legal requirements.
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle ● Keep in mind the instructions in the manual
wheels on the road; it can also be towed with
● Accelerate with particular care and cau- either the front or rear wheels lifted off the on towing vehicles.
tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres. road.
● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. CAUTION
● Switch the ignition on.
● Bear in mind the information and instruc- If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-
● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se- cant in the automatic transmission the car
tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.
lector lever in the N ››› page 198 position. may only be towed with the driven wheels
● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at lifted clear of the road, or transported on a
Tow rope or tow bar
speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph). special car transporter or trailer.
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a
● The vehicle must not be towed further than
tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A
50 km (30 miles). Note
tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is
not available. ● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with The vehicle can only be towed if the steer-
automatic transmission are only allowed to ing lock electronic gearbox lock is deacti-
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid vated. If the vehicle has no power supply or
be towed with the front wheels suspended.
damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to there is an electric system fault, the engine
use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- must be started using jump leads to deacti-
Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-
ilarly elastic material. vate the steering column electronic gear-
mitted
box lock.
Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to
● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-
the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.
cant.
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de- ● If the battery is flat and the steering cannot
vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted be unlocked as a result, the electronic steer-
if it has been specially designed to be instal- ing lock and electronic parking brake cannot
led on a tow hitch ››› page 248. be disengaged.
● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-
elled.
53
Emergencies
Front towline anchorage Bear in mind the instructions for towing Rear towline anchorage
››› page 52.
CAUTION
Fig. 46 Right side of the front bumper: towline Fig. 48 Right side of the rear bumper: towline
anchorage in position. The towing eye must always be completely anchorage in position.
and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be
The housing of the removable towline an- released while towing and tow-starting. The housing of the screw towing eye is on the
chorage is on the right side of the front bump- Make sure that there are no objects that right side of the rear bumper behind a lid
er underneath a cover ››› Fig. 45. prevent the eyebolt being screwed. ››› Fig. 47.
The towing eye should always be kept in the Bear in mind the instructions for towing
vehicle. ››› page 52.
54
Fuses and bulbs
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-
55
Emergencies
Fuses inside the vehicle Colour Amp rating Fuses in the engine compartment
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
CAUTION
● Always carefully remove the fuse box
Fig. 49 On the driver's side dashboard: fuse covers and refit them correctly to avoid Fig. 50 In the engine compartment: fuse box
box cover. problems with your vehicle. cover.
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to
Opening and closing the fuse box situated To open the engine compartment fuse box
avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and
below the dash panel ● Open the bonnet ››› page 268.
humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-
● Open: remove the fuse box cover in the di- age to the electrical system. ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse
rection indicated ››› Fig. 49. box cover ››› Fig. 50.
● Close: click the cover back into place. ● Then lift the cover out.
● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
Identifying fuses below the dashboard by
Push the locking tabs down until they click
colours
audibly into place.
Colour Amp rating
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
56
Fuses and bulbs
Replace a blown fuse ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse
No. Consumer/Amps
box lid.
18 Windscreen wipers 30
58
Fuses and bulbs
● High (full-LED) main headlights Light source used for each function
should only be changed by a specialised
workshop. ● Rear bulb light
Bulb light Left Right
● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- ● LED rear light
pear in the following tables. Brake lights
2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL
● Some of the equipment listed in the ta- Full-LED headlight system Side lights
bles below pertain only to certain versions
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions Retro fog light W21W –
of the model or are optional extras.
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam
● Please note that the above lists, while and route light) with light emitting diodes Reverse light – W16W
correct at the time of printing, are subject (LEDs) as a light source.
to change. Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be Light with Left Right
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an LEDs
Changing bulbs authorised workshop to have it replaced.
Brake lights LED LED
Always use identical bulbs with the same glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
designation. The name can be found on the
base of the bulb holder. ● When changing the bulbs, take care not
to injure yourself on parts with sharp
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, edges. »
there are different sets of headlights and tail
lights:
59
Emergencies
Tail light bulbs – Remove the lid, levering the flat side of a number plate light
screwdriver into the recess ››› Fig. 54 1 .
– Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the
– Remove the bulb connector 2 .
special slot and remove the bulb.
– Unscrew the light securing bolt 3 by hand
– Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until it
or using a screwdriver.
is free.
– Remove the light from the body, gently pull-
– Change the bulb.
ing it toward you, and place on a clean,
smooth surface. – Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until it
Note
● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to
Fig. 55 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail place under the glass on the rear light unit,
light. to avoid any scratches.
● For LED lights, you can only change the
Follow the steps indicated:
turn signal and reverse light bulbs.
– Check which of the bulbs is defective.
61
Emergencies
Side turn signals Interior light and front reading front part until the two long tabs click on
the support.
lights
Note
In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to
replace the light sources. If the light does
not work, take the vehicle to an official
Service.
The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- To remove the glass
grated in the rear view mirrors.
– Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-
In case of failure, go to an authorised work- ing and the glass ››› Fig. 57.
shop to have it replaced.
– Carefully remove the glass, levering it to
avoid possible damage.
Assembly
– Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-
tly on the outer edge of the side light.
– First fit the glass with the fastening tabs
over the frame of the switch. Next press the
62
Fuses and bulbs
63
Operation
64
Controls and displays
66
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 61: 2 Engine coolant temperature display 4 Adjuster button and display.
››› page 82 or natural gas gauge in ve- 5 Speedometer.
1 Revolution counter (with the engine run- hicles with natural gas engine (CNG)
ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 79.
››› page 81
nute) ››› page 79.
3 Displays on the screen ››› page 69.
67
Operation
Details of the instruments: The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument All views will display information on the
1 Engine coolant temperature display panel digital with monochrome screen in col- screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-
››› page 82 our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi- cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).
ble using the button of the multifunction
2 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- In all views the information displayed in Infor-
steering wheel. By selecting different infor-
nute the engine is running ››› page 79. mation profiles can be customised
mation profiles, indications other than the
Gear engaged or position of the selec- ››› Fig. 62 8 .
3 classic circular instruments can be displayed,
tor lever currently selected such as navigation data, multimedia informa-
Information profiles
4 Screen display ››› page 69 tion or travel data.
Using the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option, you
5 Speedometer The 3 views are: can choose between the different options for
6 Digital speed display ● Classic displaying the information to be displayed in
7 Fuel gauge ››› page 79. ● Dynamic the SEAT Digital Cockpit (select > View >
Instrument cluster OR: > Interior
8 Information Profile ››› page 68. ● Navigation
settings > Infotainment > Instrument ● Information about the final destination. this, select the Navigation option in the
cluster). Digital display of the remaining travelling menu on the instrument panel ››› page 71.
time, distance to the destination and the esti-
Depending on the features or the navigation
Classic View mated time of arrival.
map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT
The revolutions per minute and speedometer ● Operating range. Digital display of the re- Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on
needles appear along the entire length maining range. both at the same time. If it is displayed only in
››› Fig. 62. ● Travel time. the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital
● Route guidance. Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma-
View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC1) noeuvres.
● Journey. Digital display of the distance
Personalisation of the information that ap- travelled. Transfer of navigation map
pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of
● Assist systems. Graphic representation of
these items of information can be displayed The map is transferred from the Infotainment
different assistance systems.
at the same time, but the user chooses which system to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice
to display, and in what order, by moving the ● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- versa using the map transfer key.
finger vertically over the dials. ted.
Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
● Navigation. Graphical representation of
Depending on the version, the Views can be tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu,
memorised by exiting the menu or keeping the navigation with arrows. you can transfer the map back to the Info-
the View button pressed. tainment System.
It may vary based on the features, the num-
● Consumption. Graphic representation of ber and the contents of the selectable infor-
the current consumption and digital display mation profiles.
Status display
of the average consumption.
● Audio. Digital display of the current audio Possible indications on the instrument
playback. Navigation map in the SEAT Digital
panel display
● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-
Cockpit
Different pieces of information can be dis-
tude above sea level. played on the screen of the instrument panel,
Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital
● Compass. Digital display of the compass. Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do depending on the features of the vehicle.
● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open »
“Driving mode”.
69
Operation
● Warning and information messages Doors, bonnet and rear lid open The margin of measurement ranges from
● Odometer When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- -45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).
● Time ››› page 79 ing, the instrument panel display shows if any
of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are Gear-change recommendation
● Radio, media and navigation system indi-
opened and, in some cases, it is also indica- While driving, the instrument panel of certain
cations
ted by an audible warning. The display may vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-
● Indications of the phone vary according to the type of instrument pan- tion for saving fuel ››› page 205.
● Outside temperature el fitted.
● Indications of the compass Odometer
Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutch
● Selector lever positions The odometer registers the total distance
gearbox)
travelled by the car.
● Gear-change recommendation
The current position of the selector lever is
››› page 205 shown on the side of the lever and on the in-
The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-
● Display of travel data (multifunction dis- tance travelled since the last time it was reset
strument panel display. When the lever is in
play) and menus for different settings to zero.
the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in
››› page 71 some cases, the gear engaged in each case Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:
● Service interval display ››› page 82 is shown on the instrument panel display .
● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 61 4
● Speed warning ››› page 72 to reset the trip recorder to 0.
Outside temperature indicator
● Speed warning for winter tyres ● Keep the button 4 pressed for
If the outside temperature is lower than ap-
● Start-Stop system status display about 3 seconds and the previous value will
proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal
››› page 195 be displayed.
symbol” on the outside temperature dis-
● Signs detected by the traffic signal detec- play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un- Vehicles with digital instrument panel:
tion system ››› page 75 til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C ● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-
● Active cylinder management (ACT®) status (+43 °F) ››› .
ment system or the multifunction steering
indication ››› page 208 When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux- wheel ››› page 72.
● Low consumption driving iliary heater is switched on or when driving at
● Identifying letters on engine (LDM) very low speeds, the outside temperature in- Speed warning for winter tyres
dicated may be higher than the actual tem- If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is
● Driver assistance system display
perature due to the heat produced by the en- displayed on the instrument panel
››› page 210 gine.
››› page 71.
● Copyright
70
Instruments and warning/control lamps
The speed warning can be set in the infotain- Copyright ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-
ment system using the infotainment button Legal text about the property rights and bols will stay on until you remove the
> Settings > Tyres; OR > Exterior copyrights of the instrument cluster. cause.
settings > tyres ››› page 92. ● If when switching on the ignition warnings
WARNING are shown about existing faults, it might not
Indications of the compass be possible to change the settings or show
Even when the outside temperature is high-
Depending on the equipment, when the igni- the information as described. In this case,
er than freezing temperature, some roads
tion is on, the instrument panel display indi- go to a specialised workshop and request a
and bridges could be frozen.
cates the direction in which you are driving repair.
● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that
with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest. there may be a risk of freezing.
When the Infotainment system is on and there ● At outside temperatures above +4 °C
is no route guidance active, the graphic rep- (+39 °F), there may be ice even when the
Instrument panel menus
resentation of a compass is also shown. “ice crystal symbol” is not on.
The number of menus and information items
● The outside temperature sensor takes a
available will depend on the vehicle’s elec-
Low consumption driving guideline measurement.
tronics and features.
Depending on the equipment, when the vehi-
cle is moving is displayed on the instru- A specialised workshop can programme or
Note
ment cluster display when the vehicle is in an modify additional functions, according to the
● There are different instrument panels and vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting
economical consumption status due to active
therefore the versions and instructions on a SEAT dealership for this.
cylinder management (ACT®) ››› page 208.
the display may vary. In the case of dis-
plays without warning or information texts, Some menu options can only be read when
Identifying letters on engine (LDM) faults are indicated exclusively by the con- the vehicle is stationary.
Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: trol warning lamps. ■ Driving data ››› page 72
● Some indications on the instrument panel
● Switch the ignition on, but do not start the ■ Assistance systems
screen may be concealed by a sudden
engine. ■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 217
event, e.g. an incoming call.
● Hold the button ››› Fig. 61 down
4
● Depending on the equipment, some set-
■ ACC (only display) ››› page 220
for more than 15 seconds to display the iden- ■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 226
tings and instructions can be carried out or
tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB).
displayed on the infotainment system as ■ Side Assist On/Off ››› page 230
well. ■ Navigation
● If there are several warnings at the same ■ Audio
time, the symbols will be displayed one af- ■ Telephone »
71
Operation
■ Vehicle status ››› page 73 Restart the oil service Change from one display to another
Select the Restore Oil service menu and ● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
follow the instructions on the instrument pan- tion steering wheel ››› page 84.
Service Menu el display.
3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display Changing memory
(Digital SEAT Cockpit) Restart journey data Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:
Select the Reset trip menu and follow the ● Press the button on the windscreen
In the Service menu various settings can be
instructions on the instrument panel display wiper lever or the button of the multifunc-
adjusted depending on the features.
to reset the value. tion steering wheel.
Open the Service menu
Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Vehicles with digital instrument panel:
To open up the Service menu, select the ● While in Travel data > General infor-
Select the menu Engine code. The identify-
Range information profile while in the Driv-
ing letters of the engine will be shown on the mation press on the multi-function steer-
ing data menu, and keep the key press-
instrument cluster display at the bottom left. ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo-
ed on the multifunction steering wheel for ap-
ries1):
proximately 4 seconds. When it is released,
Setting the clock
the Service menu will be displayed. Now – Since start: The memory is deleted if
you can browse through the menu using the Select the Time menu and set the correct the journey is interrupted for more than 2
keys on the multifunction steering wheel as time by turning the right thumbwheel of the hours.
usual. multifunction steering wheel.
– Since refuelling: Display and stor-
age of the journey data and the con-
Restart the service interval display sumption values collected. When refuel-
Select the Service menu and follow the in- Driving data indicator (multifunc- ling, the memory is deleted.
structions on the screen of the instrument tion display) – Long-term: This memory contains trav-
panel. el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and
The display of the travel data (multifunction
59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,
display) shows different values about the
or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or
journey and the consumption.
9999.9 km. When one of these values is
exceeded (varies depending on the ver- – Average speed: The average speed Display Oil temperature
sion of the instrument panel), the memo- will be shown after driving for approxi- The engine reaches its operating tempera-
ry is deleted. mately 100 metres. ture when, under normal driving conditions,
– Digital speed display: Current the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F)
Delete journey data presets speed displayed in digital format. and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required
● Select the memory that you wish to erase. – Eco tips: Recommendations messag- from the engine and the outside temperature
● Hold the button of the multifunction es are shown to reduce consumption is high, the engine oil temperature may in-
steering wheel or the button of the multi- through good driving practices, e.g. Air crease. This does not present any problem as
function wheel pressed down for about 2 conditioning on: close the win- long as the warning lamps or
seconds. dow. ››› page 272 do not appear on the display.
driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi- The Fatigue detection informs the driver when Switching on and off
nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio- their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue. Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-
nal assistance. vated in the infotainment system using the
Function and operation function button > Driver assistance > Fa-
Priority 2 warning (yellow) Fatigue detection determines the driving be- tigue detector ››› page 92. A mark indi-
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- haviour of the driver when starting a journey, cates that the adjustment has been activa-
companied by audible warnings). Operating making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- ted.
faults or the lack of operating fluids can stantly compared with the current driving be-
cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. haviour. If the system detects that the driver is System limitations
Check the faulty function as soon as possible. tired, an audible warning is given with a The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
If necessary, seek professional assistance. sound and an optic warning is shown with a inherent to the system. The following condi-
symbol and complementary message on the tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
Information message instrument panel display ››› Fig. 63. The mes- vent it from functioning.
sage on the instrument panel display is
It provides information about processes in the
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
vehicle.
pending on the case, is repeated. The system ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
stores the last message displayed.
● When cornering
Driver alert system (break recom- The message on the instrument panel display
● On roads in poor condition
can be switched off by pressing the
mendation) ● In unfavourable weather conditions
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
button on the multi function steering wheel ● When a sporty driving style is employed
››› page 84. ● In the event of a serious distraction to the
The message can be recalled to the instru- driver
ment panel display using the multifunction
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
display ››› page 72.
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
Conditions of operation
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
Driving behaviour is only calculated on opened the door.
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph). In the event of slow driving during a long peri-
Fig. 63 On the instrument panel display: driver od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-
alert system symbol. tem automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
74
Instruments and warning/control lamps
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- ● If there is a fault in the system, have it The traffic sign detection system records the
ted. checked by a specialised workshop. standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle
with a camera located on the base of the in-
WARNING terior mirror and provides information about
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.
Road signs detection system1)
gue detection system tempt you into taking Within its limitations, the system also displays
any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, additional signals, such as time-specific pro-
sufficient in length when making long jour- hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers
neys.
››› page 248 or limitations that only apply in
● The driver always assumes the responsi- the event of rain. Even on journeys without
bility of driving to their full capacity. signs, the system may display any applicable
● Never drive if you are tired. speed limits.
● The system does not detect the tiredness The traffic sign detection system does not
of the driver in all circumstances. Consult work in all countries. Keep this in mind when
the information in the section ››› page 74, travelling abroad.
System limitations.
● In some situations, the system may incor- Shown on the display
rectly interpret an intended driving ma-
In Germany, on motorways and vehicle
noeuvre as driver tiredness.
roads, besides speed limits and overtaking
● No warning is given in the event of the ef-
provisions the system also displays the end of
fect called microsleep!
prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the
● Please observe the indications on the in- time in other countries is always shown.
strument panel and act as is necessary.
The traffic signs detected by the system are
displayed on the dash panel display
Note ››› Fig. 64 and, depending on the navigation
● Fatigue detection has been developed Fig. 64 On the instrument panel display: ex- system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-
for driving on motorways and well paved amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- ment system as well ››› page 88. »
roads only. tions with their respective additional signs.
Road sign detection system messages: Activate and deactivate the road sign dis- hibited, the latter sign will be displayed
There are no traffic signs available play on the instrument panel in second place ››› Fig. 64 C.
● The system is in its start-up phase. The permanent traffic sign view on the instru-
ment cluster can be switched on or off in the Speed warning
● OR: the camera has not recognized any
infotainment system using the function button If the system detects that the permitted
mandatory or prohibitive sign. > Driver assistance. speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver
with a “gong” and visually with a message on
Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display
Display of traffic signs the dash panel display.
● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys-
tem checked by a specialised workshop. When the traffic sign detection system is con- The speed warning can be set or completely
nected, a camera located on the base of the switched off in the infotainment system using
Speed warning currently unavailable interior rear-view mirror records the traffic the function button > Driver assis-
● The speed warning function of the road signs in front of the vehicle. After checking tance ››› page 88. The warning can be set
sign detection system is faulty. Have the sys- and evaluating the information from the cam- to 0 km/h (0 mph), 5 km/h (3 mph) or 10 km/h
tem checked by a specialised workshop. era, the navigation system and the current (5 mph) above the maximum permitted
vehicle data, up to three valid road signs are speed.
Dynamic Road Sign Display: please displayed, ››› Fig. 64 with their additional
clean the windscreen. signs. Trailer mode
● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area.
First: The sign that is currently valid for the In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
Clean the windscreen. device from the factory and a trailer that is
driver is shown in the left side of the
screen For example, a maximum speed electrically connected to the vehicle, it is
Dynamic Road Sign Display currently
limit of 130 km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 64 A. possible to activate or deactivate the display
restricted.
of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,
● The navigation system is not transmitting Second: A sign valid only in certain circum-
such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
data. Check if the navigation system has up- stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown
tions. It can be activated or deactivated in the
dated maps. second, together with the additional rain
infotainment system using the function button
sign.
● OR: the vehicle is in a region not included > Driver assistance > Trailer as-
on the navigation system's map. Additional sign: The supplementary panel sist ››› page 88.
will display the circumstances (rain,
No data available times of day, fog, etc.) under which the For trailer mode, the display of speed limits
displayed speed limit is in force. applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal
● The traffic sign detection system does not
provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-
work in the current country. Third: Thirdly, a sign prohibiting overtaking is
justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a
partially displayed. If there is no condi-
range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and
tional speed limit and overtaking is pro-
76
Instruments and warning/control lamps
130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed ● In the case of variable messages on over-
tion system may differ from the actual cur-
greater than that which is permitted in the head or gantry signs (LED-based variable rent traffic situation.
country in question for driving with a trailer, traffic signs or other lighting units).
● The system may not detect or correctly
the system automatically displays the usual ● If the maps on the navigation system are show all the traffic signs.
speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h not up-to-date. ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
(50 mph).
● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles priority over the recommendations and dis-
If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on plays provided by the system.
vated, the system displays the speed limits as lorries.
if there were no trailer hitched.
WARNING
WARNING
Limited operation If messages are ignored, the vehicle may
The technology in the traffic sign detection stall in traffic and cause accidents and se-
The traffic sign detection system has certain system cannot change the limits imposed vere injuries.
limitations. The following cases may lead the by the laws of physics and only works with-
● Never ignore the messages displayed.
system to operate with limitations or not at in the system's limits. Do not let the extra
convenience afforded by the traffic sign ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
all:
detection system tempt you into taking any and in a safe place.
● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, risks when driving. The system is not a re-
rain, fog or intense mist. placement for driver awareness.
Note
● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
To avoid affecting the correct operation of
on traffic or by the sun. visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
the system, take the following points into
tions.
● When driving at high speeds. consideration:
● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and
● If the camera is covered or dirty. ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the
fog may lead to the system failing to dis-
● If the traffic signs are out of the camera's camera and keep it in a clean state, without
play traffic signs or not displaying them
snow or ice.
field of vision. correctly.
● Do not cover the field of vision of the
● If the traffic signs are partially or totally ● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
camera.
covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi- ered or damaged, system operation may
be impaired. ● Always replace damaged or worn blades
cles.
when required to avoid lines on the cam-
● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil era's field of vision.
the regulations. WARNING
● Check that the windscreen is not dam-
● In the case of damaged or bent traffic The driving recommendations and traffic aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
signs. indications shown on the traffic sign detec- sion. »
77
Operation
● The use of outdated maps on the naviga- When you approach places such as a junc- Eco-efficient driving assistance is available
tion system may cause the system to show tion, a roundabout or a section of road with a depending on the equipment, although not in
traffic signs incorrectly. speed limit, the symbol is displayed along all countries.
● In the waypoints mode of the navigation
with an event in the digital cockpit ››› Fig. 65.
system, the traffic sign detection system is
WARNING
As soon as you follow the indication and take
only partly available. your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle The system is not a replacement for driver
● Failure to heed the control lamps and adapts, based on the selected driving profile awareness.
corresponding text messages when they and distance to the incident, brake energy re- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
light up may result in damage to the vehi- cuperation and speed. times to suit visibility, weather, road and
cle. traffic conditions.
Eco-efficient driving assistance uses the trip
● Traffic signs on the road and traffic regu-
data from the infotainment system and the
sensors of some assist systems. If no destina- lations have priority over eco-driving notes.
Eco-efficient driving assistance tion guidance is active, the most likely route is
used. Note
Pressing the accelerator can cancel the in- ● The appearance of the symbols may vary
tervention of the assistance at any time. slightly depending on the equipment and
model. System updates may modify or ex-
Eco-efficient driving assistance can be pand the symbols.
switched on and off in the infotainment sys-
● When the system is switched on, eco-ef-
tem, in the assist system settings
ficient driving assistance can also increase
››› page 92. recuperation without any indication being
Eco-efficient driving assistance is temporarily displayed. This can occur in situations such
switched off if: as when the accelerator pedal is released
when a vehicle is driving in front. In this
Fig. 65 Eco-efficient driving assistance indi- ● The gear selector is in the S position. case, energy recuperation is adapted
cation (schematic representation). ● The sport driving program is used. match the speed of the vehicle in front
without any indication being displayed.
Eco-efficient driving assistance helps you ● Driving with adaptive cruise control (ACC)
drive with care and with low energy con- or cruise control (GRA).
sumption by following instructions superim-
When these conditions no longer exist, the
posed in the digital cockpit, depending on the
assistance is reactivated if it is switched on in
situation.
the assist system settings.
78
Instruments and warning/control lamps
80
Instruments and warning/control lamps
A Natural gas gauge The display only works when the ignition is the refuelled amount with a slight delay
B Petrol gauge switched on. (depending on the refuelled amount).
81
Operation
Engine coolant temperature indica- B Normal zone. At high outside tempera- CAUTION
tures and when making the engine work
tor. ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,
hard, the diodes may continue lighting up
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
and reach the upper zone. This is no
making the engine work hard for approxi-
cause for concern, provided the control
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
lamp does not light up
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm
C Warning area. When the engine is work- also depends on the outside temperature. If
ing hard, especially at high outside tem- necessary, use the engine oil temperature
peratures, the diodes may light up in the as a guide ››› page 72››› page 73.
warning area. ● Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-
The coolant temperature gauge only works fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-
when the ignition is switched on. atures and high engine loads, there is a risk
of the engine overheating.
Fig. 69 Analogue instrument panel: engine
Control and warning lamp
coolant temperature indicator. ● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-
tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle
It lights up red is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can
reduce the cooling effect, which could
Do not carry on driving!
Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-
high. cialist assistance.
Flashes red
Service intervals
Fault in the engine coolant system.
The service interval indication appears on the
● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
instrument panel display and the Infotain-
let it cool down.
Fig. 70 Digital instrument panel: engine cool- ment system.
ant temperature indicator. ● Check the engine coolant level
There are different versions of instrument
››› page 274.
panels and infotainment systems, so the ver-
A Cool zone. The engine has not reached ● If the warning lamp does not switch off even
sions and instructions on the screens may
operating temperature yet. Avoid high if the coolant level is correct, request assis- vary.
speeds and stressing the engine if it has tance from specialised personnel.
not reached operating temperature. SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
82
Instruments and warning/control lamps
services without engine oil change (e.g. In- Service due Check the date of the current service on the
spection). When the time for a service or an inspec- infotainment system
tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- ● Press the function button > Settings >
In vehicles with Services established by
time or mileage, the service intervals are al- ted when the ignition is switched on and the Service; OR > Vehicle status
ready pre-defined. fixed key symbol may appear on the in- ››› page 88.
strument panel for a few seconds, along with ● Select the Service menu option to display
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
one of the following messages: information about the services.
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work ● Service now! Vehicles with analogue instrument panel
has been greatly reduced. Because of the ● Please have your vehicle inspec- ● Press and hold the button
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
ted. ››› Fig. 61 4 for more than 5 seconds to con-
● Oil change service due! sult the service message
hicle so requires. To calculate this variation
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use ● Oil change service and inspection
Vehicles with digital instrument panel
and individual driving styles are considered. due!
● The date of the service can only be read
The advance warning first appears 20 days
through the Service menu ››› page 72.
before the date established for the corre- Inspection of compressed natural gas
sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- tanks (CNG) reminder
Resetting service interval display
maining until the next service are always
When less than 90 days for the review of the
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
compressed natural gas tanks (CNG), when
the time is given in complete days. The cur- dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
the ignition is switched on, the instrument
rent service message cannot be viewed until lows:
panel display will a reminder for review of
500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-
the gas tanks and an audible warning will be Vehicles with analogue instrument panel
ly lines are visible on the display.
emitted.
● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
Inspection reminder As approaches the service date of inspection ton ››› Fig. 61 4 .
of the gas tanks, the message and the audi- ● Switch ignition back on.
If a service or an inspection has to be carried
ble warning will stop modify accordingly.
out soon, a service reminder will be dis- ● Release the button and press it
played when the ignition is switched on. again for the next 20 seconds.
Consult a service notification
The figure displayed are the kilometres that
With the ignition switched on, the engine off Vehicles with digital instrument panel
can still be travelled or the time until the next
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current ● The service interval display can only be re-
service.
service notification can be read: set through the Service menu ››› page 72. »
83
Operation
84
Instruments and warning/control lamps
85
Operation
Control lamps Driver or passenger has not fastened seat Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 79.
belt ››› page 16.
Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-
Control and warning lamps Engine cooling fluid ››› page 82. sioners ››› page 24.
The control and warning lamps are indicators Engine oil pressure ››› page 272. Front passenger front airbag disabled
of warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.
››› page 24.
Alternator abnormality ››› page 279.
Some control and warning lamps come on
Front passenger airbag switched on
when the ignition is switched on, and switch Press the foot brake ››› page 220. ››› page 24.
off when the engine starts running, or while
driving. Defective active cruise control (ACC)
Yellow warning lamps ››› page 225
Depending on the model, additional text
Notification central lamp: additional infor-
messages may be viewed on the instrument mation on the instrument panel display Lane Assist (lane keeping system)
panel display. These may be purely informa-
››› page 226.
tive or they may be advising of the need for Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by
action ››› page 66, Instrument panel. the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation
››› page 238. Error in the lane assist warning system
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in ››› page 226.
Sport mode ››› page 238.
times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
strument panel. Travel Assist error ››› page 230.
Fault in the ABS ››› page 238.
When certain control and warning lamps are Fault in the lighting of the vehicle
lit, an audible warning is also heard. Rear fog light switched on ››› page 113. ››› page 113.
Fault in the emission control system
Red warning lamps Low engine oil level ››› page 272.
››› page 267.
Notification central lamp: additional infor- Fault in the gearbox ››› page 204.
Fault in the petrol engine management
mation on the instrument panel display ››› page 267.
Green indicator lamps
Parking brake on ››› page 235. Particulate filter blocked ››› page 267.
Turn lights or emergency lights on
Fault in the brake system ››› page 235.
Fault in the steering system ››› page 206. ››› page 113.
Fault in the steering system ››› page 206. Trailer turn signals ››› page 113.
Tyre pressure monitor system
››› page 287.
86
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Press the foot brake ››› page 199. Low consumption driving status
››› page 71.
Cruise control (GRA) ››› page 214; OR
speed limited ››› page 216; OR Adaptive
cruise control (ACC) ››› page 221. WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ig-
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
››› page 221.
nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it
may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-
ous injuries may occur.
Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning
››› page 226. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
Travel Assist active ››› page 229. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble.
Natural gas operating mode ››› page 81.
● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users.
Blue indicator lamps If necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to
Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 113. advise other drivers.
● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
Other warning lamps engine and allow it to cool.
Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is
properly closed ››› page 70. a hazardous area and could cause severe
injuries ››› page 268.
Service interval display ››› page 82.
Infotainment system How to move through the different menus ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll
and select them bar and pull up or down.
● Switch the ignition on.
Introduction Tutorial
● If the Infotainment system is off, switch it on.
The infotainment system brings together im- The first time you connect the Infotainment
● The different menus are selected directly
portant vehicle functions and systems into a system, a system tutorial will open with a brief
on the touch screen using texts, icons or but-
single central control unit, e.g. air condition- description of the main functions and how to
tons.
ing, menu settings, radio equipment and the use it.
navigation system. If the box is checked , the function is activa-
ted. Help
The actual number of menus available and
the name of the various options will depend Pressing the menu button will always take In the Help menu you will find more informa-
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. you to the last menu used. tion and tips for using the Infotainment sys-
tem.
Any changes made using the settings menus
General operating information
are automatically saved on closing those WARNING
General information on the operation of the menus.
infotainment system, as well as on the warn- Any distraction may lead to an accident,
ing and safety instructions that must be taken Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show with the risk of injury. Operating the Info-
into account, is found in ››› page 145. more content above or below those dis- tainment system while driving could dis-
played on the screen at that time, for exam- tract you from traffic.
88
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Top part of the screen D Telephone information. Information re- : main menu with the 6 main functions
A Current time garding your mobile device is displayed: divided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa-
available network signal strength, estab- ble by the user by pressing on the func-
B Driving profile and navigation informa- lished Bluetooth connection, unanswered tion).
tion. If the user has an active route, both calls, new messages, battery status, etc.
the time and the distance to the destina- : main menu in mosaic mode (all func-
tion are displayed. If there is no active
E System customisation based on user tions of the Infotainment system)
route, the driving profile is displayed. On and notifications. Some settings can be G Direct accesses to the functions of the In-
vehicles with no available driving profile, saved in the user accounts of the person- fotainment system (up to 10 functions, 5 +
the current address is displayed whenev- alization function and can therefore be 5, customisable by the user). By pressing
er there is no active route. changed automatically when switching on the icon, you can select/deselect the
user accounts. functions in question.
C Information about the air condition-
ing1). The current outside temperature is
Bottom part of the screen1)
displayed.
F Main menu display mode:
The initial configuration wizard will help you Function button: Function Function button: Function
to set up your Infotainment system the first
time you switch it on. A Press to set day and time. Press to select your home address
E using your current position or by
Every time you switch on the Infotainment Press to search and store to memory manually entering an address.
system, the initial setup screen will be dis- B the radio stations that have the best
played ››› Fig. 73 if any parameters have not reception at that moment. Disables the possibility of changing
the settings of the Infotainment sys-
been set (marked with “”) or if the Don't Press to go to the Online Media set-
C Don't show tem. If you want to run the initial con-
show again function button has not been tings. again figuration, it can be accessed
pressed. through Settings > Initial con-
Press to link your mobile phone to figuration wizard.
D
the Infotainment system.
Function button: Function
Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.
Closes the Configuration Wizard. Once one or more settings have
End been applied, press to finalise the
setup in the main menu of the wizard.
90
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Vehicle information
91
Operation
The number of assist systems and settings ■ Traffic sign recognition ››› page 75.
depend on the version and the country in
question.
■ Driver assistance
■ Park assist ››› page 241.
■ Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation
systems and brake assist ››› page 238.
■ Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop sys-
tem ››› page 195.
■ Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
››› page 220.
■ Lane Assist (lane keeping system)
››› page 226.
■ Emergency brake assistance system
(Front Assist) ››› page 217.
■ Fatigue detection ››› page 74.
92
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Opening and closing 1 Unlock the vehicle Control lamp on the vehicle key
2 Lock the vehicle When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,
Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 78 (arrow)
Set of vehicle keys 3
until all the turn signals on the vehicle once briefly, but if the button is held down for
flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-
Vehicle key the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it eral times, such as in convenience opening.
will lock again. In addition, the lamp on If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
the key flashes. up when the button is pressed, replace the
4 Folding the key shaft in and out key's battery ››› page 95.
5 Alarm button. Only press in the event of
an emergency! When the alarm button is Spare key
pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
signals light up for a short time. Press the vehicle ID number is required.
again to disconnect.
Each new key contains a microchip which
With the vehicle key the vehicle may be must be coded with the data from the vehicle
locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 96. electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
Fig. 78 Assignment of buttons on the remote work if it does not contain a microchip or the
control key. The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- microchip has not been encoded. This is also
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi- true for keys which are specially cut for the
cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote vehicle.
control and new battery is several metres
around the vehicle. The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be
obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-
If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle cialised workshop or an approved key service
using the remote control key, this should be qualified to create this kind of key.
re-synchronised ››› page 96 or the battery
changed ››› page 95. New keys or spare keys must be synchronised
before use ››› page 96.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may
be used. WARNING
Fig. 79 Vehicle key with alarm button. ● Never leave children or disabled persons
in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they
Key to the ››› Fig. 78, ››› Fig. 79
94
Opening and closing
may not be able to leave the vehicle or ● Key operation can be greatly influenced To change the battery
manage on their own. by overlapping radio signals close to the
● An uncontrolled use of the key could start vehicle working in the same range of fre-
the engine or activate any electric equip- quencies, for example, radio transmitters or
ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk mobile telephones.
of accident. The doors can be locked using ● Obstacles between the remote control
the remote control key. This could become and the vehicle, bad weather conditions
an obstacle for assistance in an emergen- and discharged batteries can considerably
cy situation. reduce the range of the remote control.
● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. ● If the buttons of the vehicle key are
An unauthorised use of your vehicle could pressed or one of the central locking but-
result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore tons ››› page 99 is pressed repeatedly in
always take the key with you when you short succession, the central locking brief- Fig. 80 Vehicle key: opening the battery com-
leave the vehicle. ly disconnects as protection against over- partment cover.
● Never remove the key from the ignition if loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the it if necessary.
steering could suddenly block and it would ● Spare remote control keys are available
be impossible to steer the vehicle. at your Technical Service, where they must
be matched to the locking system.
CAUTION ● Up to five remote control keys can be
used.
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic
components. Protect them from damage,
impacts and humidity.
95
Operation
Changing the battery place the dead battery with another of the Central locking
● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 94. same voltage, size and specifications.
● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- ● When fitting the battery, check that the Introduction
hicle key ››› Fig. 80 in the direction of the ar- polarity is correct.
row ››› . Central locking functions correctly when all
● Extract the battery from the compartment For the sake of the environment the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If
the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be
using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 81. Please dispose of your used batteries cor-
locked with the key.
● Place the new battery in the compartment rectly and with respect for the environ-
as shown ››› Fig. 81, pressing in the opposite ment. If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking
direction to that shown by the arrow ››› . and ignition system, it may only be locked
with the ignition off and the driver's door
● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 80, pressing it
closed.
onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di- Synchronize the vehicle key
rection to that shown by the arrow until it
If the button is pressed frequently outside WARNING
clicks into place.
of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- The incorrect use of the central locking
WARNING hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- system may cause serious injuries.
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re- ● The central locking system will lock all
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-
synchronised as described below: doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can
ter or any other button battery can cause
serious and even fatal injuries within a very prevent any non-authorised individual from
While the vehicle is open: opening the doors and accessing the vehi-
short time.
● Press the button on the vehicle key. cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or
● Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with
● Then close the vehicle using the key shaft accident, locked doors will complicate ac-
batteries out of reach of children. cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-
within one minute. If necessary, remove the
● If you suspect that someone may have sengers.
cover from the driver door lever ››› page 106.
swallowed a battery, seek immediate med- ● Never leave children or disabled people
ical attention. alone in the vehicle. The central locking
While the vehicle is closed:
● Press the button on the vehicle key. button can be used to lock all the doors
CAUTION from within. Therefore, passengers will be
● Then close the vehicle using the key shaft locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked
● If the battery is not changed correctly, within one minute. If necessary, remove the in the vehicle can be exposed to very high
the vehicle key may be damaged. cover from the driver door lever ››› page 106. or very low temperatures.
● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
● Depending on the time of the year, tem-
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
peratures inside a locked and closed
96
Opening and closing
vehicle can be extremely high or extremely Self-locking system to prevent involuntary Turn signals
low resulting in serious injuries and illness unlocking The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
or even death, particularly for young chil- It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
dren. intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve- is locked.
● Never leave individuals locked in a closed hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of
and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-
the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not
they may not be able to exit the vehicle by onds, it re-locks automatically.
themselves or get help.
closed correctly.
97
Operation
● Vehicle interior monitoring by the anti- Unlock and lock from the outside flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain
theft alarm system will only function as in- locked.
tended if the windows and sunroof are
closed. Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:
● Press (once) the button on the remote
control key or turn the key once in the open-
ing direction.
Central locking settings
Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the
Central locking settings can be changed in tank flap simultaneously:
the Infotainment system.
● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-
ton on the remote control key, or turn the key
Unlocking doors
twice within 5 seconds in the opening direc-
Fig. 82 Remote control key: buttons.
● Select: button > Settings > Opening tion.
and closing > Central locking > Un- ● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 82 button.
locking the doors. The Safe security system and the anti-theft
● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se- alarm deactivate immediately when only the
You can choose to unlock all the doors or curity system: push the button again and driver door is opened.
only the driver door when you unlock the hold for 2 seconds.
In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can
vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is ● Unlock: press the button.
programme the security central locking sys-
also unlocked.
● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the tem directly ››› page 98.
With the Driver setting, when you press the button for at least 1 second.
button on the remote control key once, only WARNING
the driver door is unlocked. If that button is The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the Observe the safety warnings ››› in Lock-
pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the
ing system “Safe” on page 103.
rear lid will be unlocked. rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the
car. This function prevents the vehicle from
If the button is pressed, all the vehicle remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is Note
doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you ● Do not use the remote control key until
mation signal is heard. press the button for at least one second. the vehicle is visible.
● Other functions of the remote control key
Selective unlocking system
››› page 109, Convenience open/close
The selective unlocking system allows you to function.
only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank
98
Opening and closing
Unlocking and locking from the in- be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac- Unlock and lock the vehicle with
cess and assistance.
side Keyless Access
WARNING
● The central locking switch also works
with the ignition switched off, except when
the “safe” system is activated.
● The central locking switch does not oper-
ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside
and the security system is switched on.
● Locked doors could delay assistance in
an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-
cially children, in the vehicle.
Fig. 83 Centre console: central locking button. Fig. 84 Keyless Access: proximity zones.
Note
● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 83 button.
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
● Unlock: Press the button again ››› Fig. 83.
reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
(Auto Lock) ››› page 97. You can unlock the
Please note the following when using the vehicle again using the button on the
central locking switch ››› Fig. 83to lock your central locking switch.
vehicle:
● It is not possible to open the doors or the
rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
● The central locking lamp ››› Fig. 83 lights
up when all the doors are closed and locked. Fig. 85 Door handle: sensor surfaces
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle one of the sensor surfaces on the front door Unlocking and opening the doors
may have the Keyless Access system. handles is touched. (Keyless-Entry)
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- The following features are then available ● Grip the driver door handle. When you do
tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without having to use the vehicle key actively: this, you touch the sensor surface ››› Fig. 85
without actively using its key. To do this, all A (arrow) of the handle and the vehicle un-
● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using locks.
that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in
the detection area where you are attempting the handle of the front driver’s door or the
● Open the door.
to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 84 and to touch softtouch/handle on the rear lid.
one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- ● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the On vehicles with selective opening or info-
dles ››› Fig. 85 ››› . sensor on the driver door handle. tainment system configuration, pulling the
● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine door handle twice will unlock all doors.
The vehicle can only be unlocked and locked
via the driver's door. When doing so, the re- with the starter button ››› page 191.
In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-
mote control key must be no further than ap-
The central locking and locking systems op- tem: closing and locking the doors
prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.
erate in the same way as a normal locking (Keyless-Exit)
It does not matter where you carry the key, and unlocking system. Only the controls ● Switch the ignition off.
e.g. in your jacket pocket. change.
● Close the driver's door.
Once the doors have been locked, they can- Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface
not be opened again immediately. This will double flash of the indicator lights; locking by
››› Fig. 85
B (arrow) on the driver's door
enable you to check that the doors are prop- a single flash.
handle. The door that is used must be closed.
erly closed.
If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and
If you wish you may unlock only the corre- the rear lid are closed leaving the last key In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys-
sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec- used inside the vehicle and none outside, the tem: closing and locking the doors
essary adjustments can be made in vehicles vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve- (Keyless-Exit)
with a driver information system hicle's indicator lights will flash four times. ● Switch the ignition off.
››› page 92››› page 71. The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if
● Close the driver's door.
you do not open any door or the rear lid.
General information ● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 85
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-
B (arrow) on the driver's door handle. The
If a valid key is in the proximity of the car onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open
vehicle locks with the “Safe” security system
››› Fig. 84, the Keyless Access locking and any door or boot hatch.
starting system gives the key entry as soon as ››› page 102. The door that is used must be
closed.
100
Opening and closing
● Touch (twice) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 85 of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity on the door handle. The door should not
B (arrow) of the driver door handle to lock sensors are disabled for a certain period of open.
the vehicle without activating the “Safe” se- time.
curity system ››› page 102. The next time the door can only be unlocked
Sensors will again be enabled: via the remote control or the lock cylinder.
Unlocking and locking the boot hatch The next time the door is locked/unlocked,
● After a time.
Keyless Access will be active again.
When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- ton on the key. Convenience functions
id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 84. ● OR: if the boot is opened.
To close all the electric windows and the sun-
Open or close the rear lid normally. ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with roof using the comfort function, keep a fin-
After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If the key. ger for a few seconds on the locking sensor
the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid surface ››› Fig. 85 B (arrow) of the door han-
will not lock automatically after closing it. Keyless Access temporary disconnection dle until the windows and roof have closed.
function
How the doors open when touching the sen-
What happens when locking the vehicle You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless sor surface on the door handle will depend
with a second key Access unlocking for one locking and unlock- on the settings that have been activated in
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and ing cycle. the infotainment system, using the button
it is locked from the outside with a second ve- > Settings > Opening and closing.
● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-
hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked
hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- CAUTION
for engine ignition ››› page 191. In order to
wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
enable engine ignition, press the button on The sensor surfaces on the door handles
● Close the door.
the key inside the vehicle. could engage if hit with a water jet or high
● Push the central locking button on the re- pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle
Automatically disabling sensors mote control and touch the locking sensor key in the proximity. If at least one of the
surface of the driver door handle electric windows is open and the sensor
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
››› Fig. 85 B within the following 5 seconds. surface ››› Fig. 85 B (arrow) on one of the
long period of time, the proximity sensors on
Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the handles is activated continuously, all win-
the passenger doors are automatically disa- dows will close.
vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also
bled.
possible if the vehicle is locked through the
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- driver’s door lock. Note
dles is often activated in an unusual manner ● To check that the function has been deacti- ● If the vehicle battery has little or no
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost »
101
Operation
or entirely out of charge, you will probably ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”
not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle layer of salt, the correct functioning of the security system.
with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- sensors on the door handles may be affec- ● Press the locking button once on the ve-
cle can be unlocked or locked manually ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. hicle key.
››› page 106. ● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-
● To control the proper locking of the vehi- matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the Lock the vehicle without activating the
cle, the release function is disabled for ap- gear stick is in position P. “Safe” system.
prox. 2 seconds. ● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the ● Press the locking button on the vehicle
● If the message Keyless access system remote control of the system is equipped key twice.
faulty is displayed on the screen of the with a position sensor. If this remote control
dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the does not detect movement for a certain ● On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking
operation of the Keyless Access system. length of time, the system will conclude and ignition system: touch the sensor surface
Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec- that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on on the outside part of the door handle twice.
ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for a night table) so it will be disabled.
this. When the “Safe” security system is disa-
● Depending on the function set on the in- bled, the following needs to be taken into
fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte- account:
Locking system “Safe”1)
rior mirrors will unfold and the surround ● The vehicle can be opened and unlocked
lighting will come on when unlocking the When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi- from the inside using an inside door handle.
vehicle using the sensor surface on the
ty system puts the door handles out of opera- ● The anti-theft alarm is activated.
driver and passenger door handles
tion and makes it difficult for unauthorized
››› page 124. ● The vehicle interior monitoring system and
people to enter. The doors cannot be opened
● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle the anti-tow system are disabled.
from inside ››› .
or the system fails to detect one, a warning
will display on the dash panel screen. This Depending on the vehicle, when switching the “Safe” status
could happen if any other radio frequency ignition off, a warning may be displayed on
On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-
signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. the control panel screen stating that the
ble from outside the vehicle through the win-
from a mobile device accessory) or if the “Safe” security system is activated.
dow which shows the “Safe” system status.
key is covered by another object (e.g. an
aluminium case). We will know that “Safe” system is activated
by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator
will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted that the alarm and the locking security sys- ● When the ignition is switched on with a non-
with an alarm, until they unlock. tem (double lock) have been turned on. authorised key.
If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, ● Undue manipulation of the alarm.
● “Safe” activated with or without the alarm:
continuous flashing of the warning lamp. they will not be included in the protection ● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.
zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- ● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles
● “Safe” deactivated without the alarm: the
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-
lamp stays off. with interior monitoring ››› page 104).
quently closed, they will be automatically in-
● “Safe” deactivated with the alarm: the ● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
warning lamp stays off. and the turn signals will flash accordingly anti-tow system ››› page 104).
when the doors close. ● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with
WARNING anti-tow system ››› page 104).
● The turn signal light will flash twice on
Do not leave anyone (especially children) ● When the vehicle is transported on a ferry
opening and deactivating the alarm.
in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or
and the “Safe” security system is activa- ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 104).
ted, as the doors and windows cannot then ing and activating the alarm.
● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft
be opened from the inside. Locked doors
could delay assistance in an emergency. alarm system is disconnected.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for How to turn OFF the alarm
about 30 seconds alongside a sound and
● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button
Anti-theft alarm system optical (flashing) warning signals and will be
of the key.
repeated about ten times when the vehicle is
locked and the following unauthorised ac- ● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.
Description tions are attempted:
If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to ● Opening a door that is mechanically un- using the key, the key must be inserted into
break into the vehicle or steal it. The system locked using the vehicle key without switching the ignition, and the ignition must be turned
will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer- on within 15 seconds of opening the door.
nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced. tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.
The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is and the ignition will be blocked.
on when the vehicle is locked with the key. activated immediately on opening the door).
The system is immediately activated and the ● A door is opened. CAUTION
turn signal light located on the driver door will ● Opening the bonnet. If the anti-theft security system is switched
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
● The rear lid is opened. off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the »
103
Operation
tow-away protection are automatically Interior monitoring and the anti- The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are automatically switched on
disconnected. tow system
again next time the vehicle is locked.
Note It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
rated in the anti-theft alarm which detects monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
● After 28 days, the indicator light will be
unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
switched off to prevent the battery from ex-
sound. if not, they will be automatically switched on.
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
remains activated. sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- tow system should be switched off if animals
● If, after the audible warning goes off, an- ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the on. In order to activate it, all the doors and their movements will trigger the alarm) or
rear lid is opened after a door has been the rear lid must be closed. when, for example, the vehicle is transported
opened), the alarm is triggered again. or has to be towed with only one axle on the
If the “Safe” ››› page 102 security system is
● The anti-theft alarm is not activated switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring ground.
when the vehicle is locked from within using and the tow-away protection are automati-
the central locking button . cally disconnected. Deactivation through the infotainment
● If the driver door is unlocked mechanical- system
ly with the key, only the driver door is un- Activation ● Turn off the ignition and select: button >
locked, the rest of the doors remain locked. Settings > Opening and closing >
● It is automatically switched on when the
Only when the ignition has been turned on
anti-theft alarm is activated. Central locking > Interior monitor-
will the other doors be available - but not
ing.
unlocked - and the central locking button
will be activated. Deactivation ● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle
● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat ● Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
interior monitoring and the tow-away protec-
then the anti-theft alarm will not operate
tion are switched off until the next time the
chanically or by pressing the button on the
correctly. door is opened.
remote control. The time period from when
● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the door is opened until the key is inserted in
the contact should not exceed 15 seconds, False alarms
the battery is disconnected or not working
for any reason. otherwise the alarm will be triggered. Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
● The alarm is triggered immediately if one ● Press the button on the remote control if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
of the battery cables is disconnected while twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors serve related legal requirements.
the alarm system is active. will be deactivated. The alarm system re-
mains activated.
104
Opening and closing
The following cases may cause a false once all the doors are closed (including the ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid
alarm: rear lid). only when there is nobody in the way.
● Open windows (partially or fully).
● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or CAUTION
completely).
Doors When opening and closing in an emergen-
● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, cy, carefully disassemble components and
such as loose papers, items hanging from the then reassemble them carefully to avoid
Introduction damage to the vehicle.
rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
The doors and rear lid can be locked man-
Note ually and partially opened, for example if the
● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is key or the central locking is damaged.
activated without the volumetric sensor
function, relocking will activate the alarm WARNING
with all its functions, except the volumetric
Opening and closing doors carelessly can
sensor. This function is reactivated when
cause serious injury.
the alarm is switched on again, unless it is
deliberately switched off. ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
doors and windows cannot be opened from
● If the alarm has been triggered by the
the inside.
volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by
a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver ● Never leave children or disabled people
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash alone in the car. They could be trapped in
is different to the flash indicating the alarm the car in an emergency and will not be
is activated. able to get themselves to safety.
● The vibration of a mobile phone left in- ● Depending on the time of the year, tem-
side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both cle can be extremely high or extremely low
sensors react to movements and shakes in- resulting in serious injuries and illness or
side the vehicle. even death, particularly for young children.
● If on activating the alarm, any door or the
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- WARNING
vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
the anti-tow system will only be activated
lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-
jury.
105
Operation
Emergency unlocking or locking of As a general rule, when the driver door is ● Folding/unfolding the exterior mirrors.
locked manually all other doors are locked.
the driver’s door ● Unlocking of the central locking (only oper-
When it is unlocked manually, only the driver ates the driver's door).
door opens. Please observe the instructions
relating to the anti-theft alarm system Note
››› page 103.
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 94. the vehicle is locked manually using the
key shaft ››› page 96.
● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in
the cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 87
then remove the cover upwards.
● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to Emergency lock of doors without
unlock or lock the vehicle. lock cylinders
Fig. 86 Driver door handle: Concealed lock
cylinder. Special characteristics
● The anti-theft alarm will remain active
when vehicles are unlocked. However, the
alarm will not be triggered ››› page 103.
● After the driver door is opened, you have 15
seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this
time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-
bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-
activates the anti-theft alarm system. Fig. 88 Locking the door manually.
Functions from the driver’s door lock cylin- If the central locking system should fail to
der work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder
Fig. 87 Driver door handle: lever the cover off If the vehicle does not have the “Safe” func- will have to be locked separately.
tion, the following comfort functions will not The emergency lock is located on the front of
If the central locking system should fail to op-
be available from the lock cylinder: the front passenger's door and the rear
erate, the driver door can still be locked and
doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.
unlocked by turning the key in the lock. ● Raising and lowering the side windows.
106
Opening and closing
● Pull the cap out of the opening. This function is independent of the vehicle
Rear lid
● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to electronic opening and locking systems. It
the right as far as it will go (if the door is on only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-
ted and deactivated manually, as described Introduction
the right side) or to the left (if the door is on
the left side). below:
The rear lid unlocks and locks together with
● Replace the cap. the doors.
Activating the childproof lock
Once the door has been closed it can no lon- – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in
On vehicles with Keyless Access, the rear lid
ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- unlocks automatically when it is opened
which you wish to activate the childproof
rior door handle once to unlock and open the lock. ››› page 99.
door.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the WARNING
door using the ignition key, clockwise for
Careless and unsuitable locking, opening
the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 89 and anti-
Childproof locks and closing of the rear lid can cause acci-
clockwise for the right hand side doors. dents and serious injury.
● The rear lid must not be opened when the
Deactivating the childproof lock
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door damage the tail lights.
whose childproof lock you want to deacti- ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it
vate. down with your hand on the rear window.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in the The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing
for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 89 and it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while
clockwise for the right hand side doors. driving.
● Closing the rear lid without observing
Fig. 89 Childproof lock on the left hand side Once the childproof lock is activated, the and ensuring it is clear could cause serious
door. door can only be opened from the outside. injury to you and to third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the rear lid.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
from being opened from the inside. This sys- closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-
cidentally while the vehicle is running. soning! »
107
Operation
● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al- Opening and closing the rear lid Emergency unlocking of the rear lid
low children to play inside or next to it, es-
pecially if the rear lid is open. Children
could enter the luggage compartment,
close the rear lid and become trapped. A
locked vehicle can reach extremely high
and low temperatures, depending on the
time of year, thus causing serious injuries,
illness or even death.
CAUTION
Before opening or closing the rear lid, make
sure that there is enough space to open or Fig. 90 Rear lid: opening from outside. Fig. 91 Detail of the luggage compartment:
close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a emergency unlocking
garage. The rear lid opening system operates electri-
cally. It is activated by using the insignia sha- The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in
ped handle on the rear lid ››› Fig. 90. the event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).
Note
To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or There is a groove in the luggage compart-
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that
the key has not been left inside the luggage buttons of the vehicle key. ment allowing access to the emergency
compartment. opening mechanism.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-
closed. An audible warning is also given if it is
gage compartment
opened while the vehicle is moving faster
than 6 km/h (4 mph). ● Insert the key blade into the slot and move
the key in the direction of the arrow until the
Opening and closing lock unlocks ››› Fig. 91.
● To open: pull on the handle and lift it up
››› Fig. 90. The rear lid opens automatically.
● Close: hold the gate by one of the handles
fitted to the inner lining and close it by moving
it downwards.
108
Opening and closing
Window controls The front and rear electric windows can be Convenience opening:
operated by using the controls on the driver ● Press and hold the button on the remote
door. The other doors each have a switch for control key until all the windows and the sun-
Electrically opening and closing their own window. roof have reached the desired position.
the windows
Always close the windows fully if you park the ● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but-
vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . ton on the remote control key and then keep
the key in the driver door lock until all the win-
You can use the electric windows for approx.
dows and the sunroof have reached the re-
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
quired position.
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door has been opened and the key has Convenience closing:
not been removed from the ignition.
● Press and hold button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
Safety switch
roof are closed ››› .
The safety control ››› Fig. 92 5 on the driver ● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the
door can be used to disable the electric win-
"lock" position until all the windows and the
dow buttons on the rear doors.
sunroof are closed.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
Fig. 92 Detail of the driver's door: window doors are activated. During convenience closing, first the windows
controls. and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
● Opening the window: press the button . are deactivated. Different settings can be changed using the
infotainment system. Select: button >
● Closing the window: pull the button . The safety control symbol lights up in yel- Settings > Opening and closing >
low if the buttons on the rear doors are Window operation > Convenience open-
Buttons on the driver door switched off. ing.
1 Window on the front left door
Convenience open/close function One-touch opening and closing
2 Window on the front right door
The electric windows can be opened or The one-touch automatic opening and clos-
3 Window on the rear left door
closed from outside using the vehicle key: ing is used to open or close the windows
4 Window on the rear right door
completely. It will not be necessary to hold
5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric the button of the corresponding electric win-
window buttons in the rear doors. dow. »
109
Operation
For the automatic raising function: pull the ● Never close the rear lid without observing window could not be closed before at-
button for the corresponding window up- and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise tempting to close it again.
wards until it reaches the second position. could cause serious injury to you and third
For the automatic lowering function: push parties. Make sure that no one is in the path
of a window.
the button for the corresponding window up- Window anti-trap function
wards until it reaches the second position. ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
Stop automatic movement: push or pull on injury, for example, in the electric windows.
the button of the corresponding window. jury when the electric windows close.
● The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an ● If a window is obstructed when closing au-
Resetting one-touch opening and closing obstacle for assistance in an emergency tomatically, the window stops at this point
The one-touch opening and closing function situation. and lowers immediately ››› .
is not active after the vehicle battery has ● Therefore always take the key with you ● Next, check why the window does not close
been disconnected or is flat and will have to when you leave the vehicle. before attempting it again.
be reset. ● The electric windows will work until the ● If you try within the following 10 seconds
ignition has been switched off and one of and the window closes again with difficulty or
● Pull the button of the corresponding win-
the front doors has been opened. there is an obstruction, the automatic closing
dow and hold it for one second in this posi-
tion. ● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis- will stop working for 10 seconds.
able the rear electric windows. Make sure ● If the window is still obstructed, the window
● Release the button and pull upwards and
that they have been disabled.
hold again. The one-touch function is now will stop at this point.
● For safety reasons, you should only use
ready for operation. ● If there is no obvious reason why the win-
the remote control open and close func-
tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
The automatic one-touch electric windows pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
can be reinitialised individually or several at a To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the
windows when pressing the button to close dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
time. back function is now deactivated.
them. The windows stop moving as soon as
the button is released. ● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
WARNING
will open fully when you operate one of the
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
duction on page 105.
Note
● Incorrect use of the electric windows can If the window is not able to close because it
result in injury. is stiff or because of an obstruction, the
window will automatically open again
››› page 110. If this happens, check why the
110
Opening and closing
WARNING cially if they have access to the vehicle Opening and closing the sunroof
key. If using they key unattended, they
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Elec-
could lock the vehicle, start the engine,
trically opening and closing the windows
switch on the ignition and activate the sun-
on page 110.
roof.
● The roll-back function does not prevent
● After switching off, it is still possible to
fingers or other parts of the body getting
open or close the sunroof during a short
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
space of time provided that neither the
accident.
driver nor passenger door is opened.
CAUTION
Sunroof ● To prevent damage, during winter tem-
Fig. 93 On the interior roof lining: sunroof but-
peratures remove any ice or snow that
ton.
Introduction might be on the car roof before opening the
sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.
The button ››› Fig. 93 has two levels. The
The sunroof only works when the ignition is ● Before leaving the vehicle or in case of first level switches the sunroof to the tilted po-
switched on. Once the ignition has been rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the sition, opening or closing it fully or partially.
switched off, you can still open or close the sunroof open or in a tilted position, water
sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver can enter the interior and can cause con- On the second level, the sunroof automati-
door and the front passenger door are not siderable damage to the electrical system. cally moves to the corresponding final posi-
opened. As a result, other damage can occur in the tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat-
vehicle. ing the button again stops the automatic
WARNING function.
If the sunroof is used negligently or without Note
paying due attention, it can cause serious Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof
● Leaves and other loose objects that ac-
injury. ● Press the rear part of the button B to the
cumulate on the sunroof rails should be
● Open or close the sunroof and the sun regularly cleaned away either by hand or first level.
blind only when no one is in their path of with a vacuum. ● Automatic function: briefly press the rear
movement. ● If the sunroof does not work correctly, the part of button B to the second level. »
● Never leave any key inside the vehicle anti-trap function will not work either. Con-
when exiting. tact a specialised workshop.
● Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle, espe-
111
Operation
Closing the sunroof from a tilted position Convenience function to open or venience closing, the windows and the sun-
roof close at the same time.
● Press the front part of the button A to the close the sunroof
first level.
Using the Keyless Access system (only
● Automatic function: briefly press the front
closing)
part of the button A to the second level.
● Press and hold the locking sensor surface
Stopping the automatic operation by ad- ››› Fig. 94 (arrow) on the door handle to close
justing the tilted position of the sunroof or the sunroof. If you release the sensor surface,
by closing the sunroof the closing movement stops.
WARNING It lights up
Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap Rear fog light switched on ››› page 115.
function can cause serious injuries.
● Always be careful when closing the sun-
It lights up
roof.
● No person should ever remain in the way Left or right turn signal.
The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn
of the sunroof, especially when closing
signal is faulty.
without the anti-trap function.
Fig. 95 Dash panel: lights control.
● The anti-trap function does not prevent Hazard warning lights on ››› page 119.
fingers or other parts of the body from be- ● Turn the switch to the required position
coming trapped against the roof frame and It lights up ››› Fig. 95.
injuries occurring.
Trailer turn signals
Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is
bol ed off switched on
It lights up
Fog lights, dipped Light off or day-
Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 115. beam and side time driving light
lights off. on »
Several warning and control lamps light up
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
113
Operation
● The rain sensor detects rain and activates ● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of
Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is
bol ed off switched on the wipers. They switch off when the wipers the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the
have not been activated for a few minutes. dipped beam immediately returns to its nor-
The “Coming mal position.
Automatic control
home” and “Leaving Daytime running lights
of dipped beam
home” guide lights
and daytime run- Audible warnings to advise the driver that
may be switched The daytime running lights consist of individu-
ning light. the lights have not been switched off
on. al lights, integrated in the front headlights.
These lights come on when the daytime run- If the key is not in the ignition and the driver
Daylight running
Side light on.
lights switched on. ning lights are switched on. On vehicles door is open, an audible warning signal is
equipped with LED tail lights, the rear side heard in the following cases: this will remind
Dipped beam head- Dipped beam light is switched on as well ››› . you to turn the light off.
light off switched on.
The daytime running lights turn on every time ● When the parking light is on ››› page 115.
The driver is personally responsible for the the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in
● When the light switch is in position or .
correct use and adjustment of the lights in all position or , according to the level of ex-
situations. terior lighting.
WARNING
When the light switch is in position , a light
Automatic dipped beam headlight control If the road is not well lit and other road
sensor automatically switches dipped beam users cannot see the vehicle well enough
on and off (including the control and instru- or at all, accidents may occur.
The automatic dipped beam control is merely ment lighting) or the daytime running lights
● The automatic dipped beam control
intended as an aid and is not able to recog- depending on the level of exterior lighting.
( ) only switches on the dipped beam
nise all driving situations. when there are changes in light conditions
Motorway light but not, for example, when it is foggy.
When the light switch is in position , the
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and The motorway light is available on vehicles
switch lighting switch on automatically in the equipped with full-LED lights. WARNING
following situations ››› : The function is connected and disconnected The side lights or daytime running lights
● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex- via the corresponding Infotainment system are not bright enough to illuminate the road
ample, when driving through a tunnel. They menu. ahead and to ensure that other road users
switch off when adequate lighting is detec- are able to see you.
● Activation: when going above 110 km/h
ted. ● Always use your dipped beam head
(68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip-
lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.
ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-
er's visibility distance.
114
Lights
● Never drive with daytime lights if the road Fog lights Turn signal and main beam lever
is not well lit due to weather or lighting
conditions.
● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,
when activating the daytime running light
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-
cle which does not have the rear lights on
may not be visible to other drivers in the
darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in
conditions of poor visibility.
WARNING
Fig. 96 Dash panel: lights control. Fig. 97 Turn signal and main beam lever.
If the headlights are set too high and not
used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or
distracting other road users. This could re-
The warning lamps or also show, on the More the lever to the required position:
sult in a serious accident. light switch or instrument panel, when the
front fog lights are on. 1 Right turn light or right-hand parking light
● Always make sure that the headlights are (ignition switched off).
correctly adjusted. ● Turning on the front fog lights : pull the 2 Left turn light or left-hand parking light
light switch out from its first click position (ignition switched off).
Note ››› Fig. 96 1 , from positions , or .
3 Main beam on: control lamp lit up on
● The legal requirements regarding the use ● Turning on the rear fog light : pull the
the instrument panel.
of vehicle lights in each country must be light switch fully out 2 from position , or
4 Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-
observed. . This control has only one position in ve-
trol lamp lit up.
● The dipped beam headlights will only hicles without fog lights.
work with the ignition on. The side lights ● To switch off the fog lights, press the light Push the lever all the way down to turn off the
come on automatically when the ignition is switch or turn it to position . corresponding function.
turned off.
Note Convenience turn signals
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind When the ignition is switched on, move the
you. You should use the rear fog light only lever as far as possible upwards or down-
when visibility is very poor. wards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times. »
115
Operation
The convenience turn signals are activated WARNING ● The parking light does not activate auto-
and deactivated in the infotainment system matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause
using button > Settings > Light > nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-
accidents and serious injury, as the main
Light assistance > Convenience turn ted.
beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.
signals ››› page 92.
When the main beam light is on, the main ● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc- CAUTION
beam indicator lamp lights up on the instru- tion and with a central reservation barrier
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
ment cluster. where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry driv-
tem, take the following points into consid-
ers.
eration:
Switching the main beam assist off ● In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain
● Clean the field of vision of the camera
● Turn the light switch to a position other than ● In the event of dust or sand storms regularly and make sure it is free of snow
››› Fig. 95. ● If the windscreen is damaged in the cam- and ice.
● OR: if the main beam assist is on, pull the era's field of vision. ● Do not cover the field of vision of the
turn signal and main beam headlight lever camera.
● If the camera's field of vision is misted up,
backwards ››› Fig. 97 4 . ● Check that the windscreen is not dam-
dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.
● OR: if the main beam assistant is on, but the aged in the area of the field of vision of the
● If the camera is damaged or if the power
main beam does not turn on, press the turn camera.
supply has been cut off.
signal and main beam lever forwards to turn
the main beam on manually. Pull the turn sig- Note
WARNING
nal and main beam lever back to switch off
The convenience features of the main ● The headlight flasher can be turned on
the main beam manually, if necessary.
beam assist should not encourage the tak- and off manually at any time with the turn
● OR: switch off the ignition. signal and main beam lever ››› page 115.
ing of risks. The system is not a replace-
ment for driver concentration. ● If there are objects that radiate light in
System limitations
● You are always in control of the main the camera's area of influence, e.g. a port-
In the following cases, the main beam head- beam and adapting it to the light, visibility able navigation system, this may affect the
light must be switched off manually because and traffic conditions. operation of the main beam assist system.
the main beam assist will not disconnect it on ● It is possible that the main beam head-
time or disconnect it at all: light control does not recognise all driving
● On roads with insufficient lighting with very
situations and is limited under certain cir- Fog lights with cornering light func-
cumstances.
reflective signs tion
● When the field of vision of the camera is
● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe- 3 Not available on vehicles equipped with full-
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of
destrians or cyclists. LED headlights and bulb fog lights.
the main beam control may be affected.
● On closed curves, when the traffic in the This also applies when changes are made
The cornering light function is an additional
opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro- to the vehicle lighting system, for example,
function to the dipped beam headlights to
nounced slopes or inclinations. if additional headlights are installed.
improve lighting of the side of the road when
taking a sharp turn at low speed. »
117
Operation
The cornering light function works when the Activating the “Coming Home” function Activating the “Leaving Home” function
dipped beam headlights are already on and For vehicles with light and rain sensors. ● Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
it is activated when driving at speeds below
● Switch off the engine and remove the key ● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
from the ignition with the light switch in posi- ted when the light switch is in position
● If the steering wheel is turned or the turn tion ››› page 113. and the light sensor detects darkness.
signal is switched on, the front fog light grad- ● The automatic “Coming Home” function is
ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering only active when the light sensor detects The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off
light function is gradually switched off. darkness. in the following cases:
● When engaging reverse gear, both front fog ● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”
lights turn on. For vehicles without light and rain sensors. delay period ends (default 30 sec).
● Switch the ignition off.
● When the vehicle is locked using the remote
● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- control.
“Coming home” and “Leav- mately 1 second. ● When the light switch is turned to position .
ing home” function ● With the ignition is switched on.
When the driver door is opened, the “Coming
Home” lighting comes on. The delay in
The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”
switching off the headlights is counted from Note
function lights up the vehicle’s immediate
when the last door or boot hatch is closed. To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-
proximity when getting into and out of it in the
dark. When switched on, the front position ing Home” function, the rotary light switch
and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li- The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in must be in position and the light sensor
cense plate light come on. the following cases: must detect darkness.
● Automatically, once the headlight turn off
The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-
delay has elapsed.
sensor.
● Automatically, when a vehicle door or the
In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain- rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting
ment system you can adjust the duration of the engine.
the light switch-off delay, and activate and
● When the rotary light switch is turned to po-
deactivate the function.
sition ››› page 113.
● With the ignition is switched on.
118
Lights
Hazard warning lights 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when Note
you leave the vehicle.
● The battery will run down if the hazard
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the warning lights are left on for a long time,
hazard warning lights are switched on. The even if the ignition is switched off.
two turn signal turn signal lamps and the ● The use of the hazard warning lights de-
turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-
the same time. The simultaneous hazard utory requirements.
warning lights also work when the ignition is
switched off.
Light range control
Emergency braking warning
Fig. 98 Dash panel: hazard warning lights If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-
switch ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50
mph), the brake light flashes several times per
The hazard warning lights are used to draw second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If
the attention of other road users to your vehi- you continue braking, the hazard warning
cle in emergencies. lights will come on automatically when the
vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off
If your vehicle breaks down:
automatically when the vehicle starts to
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from move again.
moving traffic.
WARNING Fig. 99 Next to the steering wheel: headlight
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights ››› . ● The risk of an accident increases if your range control.
vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-
3. Switch the ignition off. ard warning lights and a warning triangle to The headlight range control ››› Fig. 99 is
draw the attention of other road users to modified according to the value of the head-
4. Apply the handbrake.
your stationary vehicle. light beam and the vehicle load status. This
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; offers the driver optimum visibility and the
● Due to the high temperatures that the
for an automatic gearbox, move the gear headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers
catalytic converter can reach, never park
lever to P. in an area where the catalytic converter ››› .
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- could come into contact with highly inflam- The headlights can only be adjusted when
tention of other road users to your vehicle. mable materials, for example dry grass or the dipped beam is switched on. »
spilt petrol. This could start a fire.
119
Operation
120
Lights
Background lighting
The background lighting lights up the area of
the centre console and the footwell area and,
depending on the version, the front door pan-
els and the air vents as well.
Fig. 100 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of
the passenger compartment. It will be switched on at full brightness when
the doors are opened and the lights will be
Knob Function dimmed during driving, when the light selec-
tor is set to , or .
Turns off the interior lights.
The intensity of the background lighting can
Turning the interior lights on or off. be adjusted through the infotainment system
menu. The colour can also be changed in
The interior lights come on automati- versions with lighting on the front door panel
cally when you unlock the vehicle,
(select > Settings > Background
open a door or remove the key from
lighting; OR: > Background light-
the ignition.
The light goes out a few seconds after ing››› page 88).
closing all the doors, when locking the
vehicle or connecting the ignition.
121
Operation
Visibility More the lever to the required position: other obstacles on the windscreen may
damage the wiper and the windscreen wip-
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. er motor.
Windscreen wiper and rear 4 Hold the lever down for more time to in-
● If necessary, remove snow and ice from
crease the wipe frequency.
window wiper systems the windscreen wipers before starting your
Windscreen washer. The windscreen journey.
washer function is activated by push-
● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if
Window washer lever 5 ing the lever towards the steering
wheel, and the wipers operate simulta- the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the
neously. windscreen wipers while dry can cause
damage.
Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-
● In icy conditions, always check that the
6 er will wipe the window approximately
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
every six seconds.
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
The rear window wash function is acti- may help to leave the vehicle parked with
7 vated by pressing the lever, and the the wipers in service position ››› page 48.
rear wiper starts simultaneously.
Note
WARNING
● The windscreen and window wipers only
In cold conditions you should not use the
Fig. 101 Operating the windscreen wiper and function when the ignition is switched on
wash/wipe system unless you have
rear wiper. and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are
warmed the windscreen with the heating
closed.
and ventilation system. The windscreen
More the lever to the required position: washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the ● The interval wipe speed varies according
windscreen and obscure your view of the to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle
0 Windscreen wipers off.
road. is moving, the more often the windscreen is
cleaned.
Wiper intervals.
Use control ››› Fig. 101 A to set the in- CAUTION
● The rear wiper is automatically switched
1 terval (vehicles without rain sensor), or on when the windscreen wiper is on and the
the sensitivity of the rain sensor. If the ignition is switched off while the wind- car is in reverse gear.
screen wipers are switched on, they com-
2 Slow wipe. plete their wipe and return to the rest posi-
tion. When the ignition is switched back on,
3 Continuous wipe.
the windscreen wiper will continue to oper-
ate at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and
122
Visibility
Wiper functions sequence will begin without performing the The rain sensor controls the frequency of the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the
Windscreen wipers performance in differ- again, you have to turn the ignition off and amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the rain
ent situations then on again. sensor can be adjusted manually. Manual
● If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi-
wipe ››› page 122.
tion temporarily moves to the previous posi- Move the lever to the required position
tion. Rain sensor ››› Fig. 102:
● The air conditioner comes on for approxi-
0 Rain sensor off.
mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode
when the windscreen washer is activated, 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash- sary.
er fluid entering the inside the vehicle. A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
● When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary – Set control to the right: high sensitivity.
according to the speed. The higher the vehi- – Set control to the left: low sensitivity.
cle speed the shorter the intervals.
When the ignition is switched off and then
Note back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts
● The wiper will try to wipe away any ob- operating again when the windscreen wipers
Fig. 102 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.
are in position 1 and the vehicle is travelling
stacles that are on the windscreen. The
wiper will stop moving if the obstacle at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).
blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and
switch the wiper back on again. Modified behaviour of the rain sensor
● If you stop the vehicle with the wind- Possible causes of faults and mistaken read-
screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto- ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 103 of the
matically change to a lower position rain sensor include:
speed. The set speed will be resumed when
the vehicle pulls away. ● Damaged wipers: a film of water on the
● The windscreen will be wiped again ap- damaged blades may lengthen the activa-
proximately 5 seconds after the wind- tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-
screen washer has been activated, provi- sult in a fast and continuous wipe.
ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function). Fig. 103 Rain sensor sensitive surface
● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger
If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec- the windscreen wiper. »
onds after the “drip” function, a new wash
123
Operation
WARNING WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle Manually folding the exterior mir-
to switch on the wipers. rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-
id may leak. This could cause irritation to
rors
● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-
the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you
ually when water on the windscreen ob- The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-
come into contact with this liquid, it must
structs visibility. ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to-
be rinsed with large quantities of water. If
necessary, get medial help. wards the vehicle.
Note
Note
● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain CAUTION
sensor regularly and check the blades for Before washing the vehicle with an auto-
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle matic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors
damage ››› Fig. 103 (arrow).
rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- to avoid damage.
● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-
mend a window cleaner containing alco- faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon
hol. as possible.
● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor. This may cause
sensor disruption or faults.
124
Visibility
Adjusting the exterior mirrors ● The exterior mirror heating is not activated ● When moving the mirror, take care not to
in temperatures above approximately +20°C trap fingers between the mirror and the
(+68°F). mirror bracket.
125
Operation
Sun protection ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their Seats and headrests
housing when not in use.
● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is Keep the back of your head always as close CAUTION
stationary, as the seats could move unex- to the headrest as possible.
When assembling and disassembling the
pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and
headrests, do not let them meet the top lin-
you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur- Adjusting the headrest for short people
ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the front
thermore, an incorrect position is adopted
Lower the headrest completely, even if your seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,
when adjusting the seat.
head is below its upper edge. In the lowest this could damage the vehicle.
● Adjust the height, position and inclination position, there may be a small distance be-
of the front seats only when their move- tween the headrest and the backrest.
ment area is empty.
● Make sure there are no objects in that
Adjusting the headrests
Adjusting the headrest for tall people
area.
Push the headrest up as far as it will go.
● Make sure that the movement and lock-
ing areas of the seats are clean. WARNING
If travelling with the headrests removed or
improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or
Headrest fatal injuries in the event of accidents and
sudden braking or manoeuvres increases.
● Always travel with the headrest correctly
Introduction
installed and adjusted.
The possibilities for the adjustment and disas- ● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in
the event of an accident, adjust the head- Fig. 107 Front seat: headrest adjustment.
sembly of the headrests are described below.
Always make sure that the seats are correctly rest correctly based on your height, always
adjusted ››› page 13. making sure that its upper edge is at the
same height as the top of the head, but
All seats are equipped with a headrest. The never below eye level. Keep the back of
central rear headrest is only intended for the your head always as close to the headrest
central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do as possible and centred.
not install it on any other seat. ● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Correct adjustment of headrest ● Under no circumstances should the rear
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is passengers travel while the headrests are
at the same level as the top of your head and in the non-use position.
under no circumstances below eye level. Fig. 108 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment. »
127
Operation
Fitting the front head restraints ● Unlock the backrest ››› page 129.
● Place the head restraint in the correct posi- ● Insert the headrest bars into the guides until
tion on the guides of the corresponding back- they perceptibly engage. It should not be
rest and insert it. possible to remove the headrest from the
Fig. 109 Front headrest: removal. backrest.
● Press the head restraint downwards until
the bars lock. ● Move the backrest until it engages properly
128
Seats and headrests
WARNING down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged ● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or
when the red marking of the button 2 is visi- is not properly engaged nobody else can
Remove the rear headrests only when it is
ble. travel in the corresponding seats (not even
necessary to fit a child seat. After removing
a child).
a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.
Converting the table to a seat
● Raise and lock in the back rest. The red CAUTION
marking on the tab 2 should no longer be
Serious damage can be caused to the vehi-
Seat functions visible when the backrest is properly secured. cle and other objects if the rear seat back-
rest is lowered or lifted without due care
Folding down and raising the rear WARNING and attention.
seat backrest Serious injuries can be caused if the rear ● Before lowering the rear seat backrest,
seat backrest is lowered or lifted without always adjust the front seats so that nei-
due care and attention. ther the headrests nor the cushions of the
● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest rear backrest can hit them.
while driving.
● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
raising the rear seat backrest.
● When lowering or lifting the rear seat
backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet
and other body parts out of its path.
● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-
sary protection all the parts of the rear
Fig. 111 Rear seat: folding the backrest. backrest must be properly engaged. This is
particularly important in the case of the
On split rear seats, the backrest can be low- centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a
ered in two sections. seat whose backrest is not properly engag-
ed they will fly forward, along with the
Folding the backrest forwards backrest, during an accident or a sudden
driving or braking manoeuvre.
● Completely lower the rear headrests
● A red signal on the button 2 warns that
››› page 127.
the backrest is not engaged. Always check
● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 111 1 for-
that the red marking is not visible when the
wards and at the same time fold the backrest backrest is in the upright position.
129
Operation
equipment ry ››› page 287. The transport of heavy object changes ve-
hicle handling and increases braking dis-
tance. Heavy objects that are not properly
WARNING
Storing objects placed or secured may cause loss of con-
Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri- trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.
ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring ● Never put too much load in the vehicle.
Positioning the luggage and cargo or braking or in case of an accident. Partic-
Both the carrying capacity as well as the
ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-
It is possible to carry objects and luggage in distribution of the load in the vehicle have
ing and they are thrown across the inside of
effects on the driving behaviour and brak-
the vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 248 and on the vehicle. Please observe the following
ing ability.
the roof ››› page 133. When doing so, please rules to minimise the risk of injury:
consider all legal provisions. ● When transporting heavy objects, the
● Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-
driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due
ly.
to the displacement of the centre of gravi-
Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely
● Secure all objects, little and large. ty.
● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly
● Place the objects in the cabin in such a ● Always distribute the load in the vehicle
as possible. way that they can never reach the airbag as evenly and horizontally as possible.
● Always place equipment and heavy ob- deployment areas while the vehicle is in ● Always place heavy objects in the boot
jects in the boot ››› . motion.
before the rear axle and as far away from it
● Position heavy items in the boot as far for- ● Keep the storage compartments closed as possible.
ward as possible. at all times while the vehicle is in motion. ● Objects in the luggage compartment
● Take into account the maximum authorised ● Place the objects in such a way that they that are unsecured could move suddenly
weight per axle, as well as the maximum au- never force any occupant of the vehicle to and modify the handling of the vehicle.
sit in an incorrect position.
thorised weight of the vehicle ››› page 308. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
● When transporting objects that take up a times to suit visibility, weather, road and
● Secure the objects to the fastening rings of
seat, never let anyone use that seat. traffic conditions.
the boot using appropriate chains or belts
● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects ● Accelerate with particular care and cau-
››› page 133.
loose in open storage compartment of the tion.
● Also place small objects safely.
vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into or on the dashboard.
● Brake earlier than usual.
account the pressure adhesive of the tyres ● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects
››› page 283. from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin
and store them safely.
130
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING Luggage compartment ● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-
ports ››› Fig. 113 by pulling it upwards and
● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-
then take it out.
pecially when the rear lid is open. Children Luggage compartment shelf
could climb into the luggage compartment, If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-
closing the door behind them; they will be der the luggage compartment double floor
trapped and run the risk of death. ››› page 132.
● Close and lock all the doors and the rear
lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you Fitting
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-
no adults or children in the vehicle.
cess” fits onto the axis of the supports
››› Fig. 113 and press down until it engages.
CAUTION
● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 112 B to the rear lid.
Electrical wires or, depending on the fea-
tures, the antenna embedded into the rear WARNING
windows could be damaged, even irrepara- Fig. 112 In the luggage compartment: remov-
bly, if they are in contact with objects. ing and fitting the shelf. Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-
ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-
jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or
Note braking or in case of an accident.
Straps for securing the load to the fasten- ● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-
ing rings are commercially available from jects or in bags on the rear shelf.
accessory shops. ● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.
CAUTION
● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that
the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
Fig. 113 In the luggage compartment: remov- ● An overloaded luggage compartment
ing and fitting the shelf. could mean that the rear shelf is not cor-
rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-
Removing aged.
● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 112 B from ● If the luggage compartment is overloa-
their hooks A . ded, remove the tray. »
131
Operation
Ensure that, when placing items of clothing When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-
on the luggage compartment cover, rear cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit
visibility is not reduced. area.
132
Transport and practical equipment
guide it downwards in a controlled manner. ● Always use belts or straps that are suita- Roof carrier
Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the ble and in good condition.
luggage compartment could be damaged. ● Tighten the belts and straps in a cross Introduction
layout over the load placed on the boot
floor and secure them to the fastening rings The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
Fastening rings safely. mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross
● Never exceed the maximum tensile load bars or conventional roof carrier systems
of the fastening rings when securing ob- cannot be secured to the roof water drains.
jects.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the
● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-
jects, the upper edge of the load is higher
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems
than the fastening rings.
can be used.
● Depending on the features, take into ac-
count the instruction panels on the boot on Cases in which cross bars and the roof
how to place the load.
carrier system should be disassembled.
● Never secure a child seat to the fastening
● When they are not used.
rings.
Fig. 116 Location of fastening rings in luggage ● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
compartment. ● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
Note
mum height, for example, in some garages.
There are fastening rings ››› Fig. 116 on the ● The maximum tensile load that the fas-
front and rear of the boot to secure loose ob- tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.
WARNING
jects and luggage with fastening belts and ● Belts, straps and securing systems for the
cords. ● Always secure the load properly using
appropriate load can be obtained from
specialised dealerships. SEAT recom- belts or retaining straps that are suitable
WARNING mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. and in a good condition.
● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining
negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-
straps are used, they could break in the
tre of gravity and driving performance.
event of braking or an accident. Objects
could then be launched across the passen- ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
ger compartment and cause serious or fa- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
tal injuries. times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions. »
133
Operation
carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on even if the maximum authorised roof load pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-
the roof ››› . has not been reached. cle.
Always check the weight of the roof carrier ● Secure heavy items as far forward as ● Keep the storage compartments closed
system, the cross bars and the weight of the possible and distribute the vehicle load at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
load to be transported and weigh them if uniformly.
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- WARNING
thorised roof load. WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi-
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier If the load is loose or not secured, it could cult the use of the pedals. This may cause
with a lower weight rating, you will not be fall from the roof carrier system or cause loss of control of the vehicle and increases
able to carry the maximum authorised roof accidents and injuries. the risk of severe injuries.
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- ● Always use belts or retaining straps that ● Make sure that nothing prevents you from
mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is are suitable and in a good condition. using the pedals at any time.
listed in the fitting instructions. ● Always secure the mat in the footwell.
● Never place other mats or other type of
Distributing a load
Distribute loads uniformly and secure them Storage compartment covers on the factory-fitted mat.
● Ensure that no objects can fall into the
correctly ››› .
driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-
Introduction tion.
Check attachments
● When the vehicle is stationary, remove
Use the storage compartments only for small
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system the objects in the footwell.
or light items.
have been installed, check the bolted con-
nections and attachments after a short jour-
WARNING WARNING
ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-
cy. Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they
cured could be thrown across the cabin in might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This
WARNING the event of sudden braking or manoeu- could lead to severe burns and damage to
vring. This may cause severe injuries as the vehicle.
● Never exceed the maximum authorised well as loss of control of the vehicle. ● Before moving a seat, make sure there
load on the roof and on the axles or the ve-
● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or are no lighters in the moving part area of
hicle's maximum authorised weight.
heavy items in open storage compartments the vehicle. »
● Never exceed the load capacity of the of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the
cross bars and the roof carrier system, cover behind the rear seats, or inside
135
Operation
● Before closing a storage compartment, Glove compartment Object holder under front seats
make sure there are no lighters in the
closing area.
● Never leave a lighter inside a storage
compartment or any other surface of the
vehicle as it could ignite due to the high
temperatures on such surfaces, particular-
ly during the summer.
CAUTION
● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-
jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat
Fig. 118 On the front passenger side: glove Fig. 119 Storage compartment under the right
and cold could damage them or render
compartment. front passenger seat.
them useless.
● Objects made from transparent materi- This compartment can hold documents in A4 Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle
als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc. and take the drawer out.
magnifying glasses or transparent suction
pads stuck to the windows can concentrate Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until
Opening and closing the glove compart-
sunlight and damage the vehicle. it engages.
ment
Depending on the equipment, under the driv-
Opening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 118 and open
er's seat there may be a magazine holder
the glove compartment.
(about the size of the instruction manual) in-
Closing: Press the glove compartment up- stead of the storage compartment.
wards.
WARNING
WARNING
If the drawer is left open, it could prevent
If the glove compartment is left open, the use of the pedals. This may cause serious
risk of causing severe injuries in the event accidents and injuries.
of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu- ● Always keep the drawer closed while the
vring increases. vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer
● Always keep the glove compartment and any objects in it could fall into the driv-
closed while the vehicle is in motion. er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.
136
Transport and practical equipment
137
Operation
Power sockets there is a possibility that they may be in- Air conditioning
jured.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed WARNING available when the engine has reached its
regularly so that air conditioner performance normal running temperature.
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and
is not adversely affected.
reduce driver concentration possibly re- ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to sulting in a serious accident. windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to
use in areas with very high levels of air pollu- ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
ensure heating and cooling are not im-
tion, the filter must be changed more fre- paired, and to prevent the windows from
use the air recirculation for long periods of
quently than stated in the Service Schedule. misting over.
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not
be refreshed. ● The air from the vents flows through the
WARNING vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in
the luggage compartment designed for this
Reduced visibility through the windows in- CAUTION purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-
creases the risk of serious accidents.
● To replace the pollen filter, always visit a structing these slots with any kind of ob-
● Always ensure that all windows are free ject.
service centre.
of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-
● Switch the climate control or air condi- ● Do not smoke while air recirculation
ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-
tioner off if you think it may be broken. This mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air
erything outside.
will avoid additional damage. Have the cli- conditioning system leaves residue on the
● Only drive when you have good visibility. evaporator, producing a permanent un-
mate control or air conditioning checked
● Always ensure that you use the air condi- by a specialised workshop. pleasant odour.
tioning, heater or rear window heating to ● Repairs to the climate control or air con- ● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
maintain good visibility to the outside. ditioning require specialist knowledge and ing at least once a month, to lubricate the
● Never leave the air recirculation on for a special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
long period of time. If the cooling system is SEAT Official Service. crease in the cooling capacity is detected,
switched off and air recirculation mode a Technical Service should be consulted to
switched on, the windows can mist over check the system.
Note
very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. ● When the engine is under extreme strain,
● When the cooling system is turned off, air
● Switch air recirculation mode off when it switch off the compressor for a moment.
coming from the outside will not be dried.
is not required.
To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT
recommends leaving the cooling system
(compressor) turned on. To do this, press
the button. The button lamp should
light up.
● The maximum heat output required to de-
frost windows as quickly as possible is only
139
Operation
Climatronic control
Automatic mode for the passenger side to set a different tem- Defrost/demist function
Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, perature. The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di-
and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa- rected at the windscreen and air recirculation
bled when the ventilation is modified manual- Blower is automatically switched off. To defrost the
ly. The power of the fan is automatically adjus- windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi-
ted. fied at temperatures over approximately
Cooling mode +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum
Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.
output.
Press the button to switch on or off the cool-
ing system. Air distribution / /
Heated rear window
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort.
Temperature 1 / 2 This only works when the engine is running
It can also be manually distributed to the de-
and switches off automatically after a maxi-
The temperature of the right and left sides sired zone by pressing the corresponding
mum of 10 minutes.
can be adjusted separately using the adjust- button:
ers. The selected temperature is shown on It should be switched off as soon as the glass
the display of the climate control panel. The airflow is directed towards the chest is demisted. By saving electrical power you
The airflow is directed towards the foot- can also save fuel.
Synchronisation: press button so that
settings on the driver's side apply to the pas- well.
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
senger side. Use the temperature regulator The airflow is directed at the windscreen. automatic temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when
140
Air conditioning
Air recirculation
››› page 143
Fig. 123 In the centre console: controls for the manual air conditioning; heating and fresh air system controls.
Cooling mode Blower The airflow is directed towards the foot-
Manual air conditioning: Press the button to Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power. well.
switch on or off the cooling system. The airflow is directed towards the wind-
At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioning
screen and the footwell area.
are disconnected. Level 4 is the maximum.
Temperature 1
Defrost/demist function
Turn the control to adjust the temperature. Air distribution / / / /
Manual air conditioning: When control 3 is in
Heating and fresh air system: The tempera- Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to the
position the air flow is directed at the wind-
ture cannot be lower than that of the exterior desired zone:
screen and air recirculation is disconnected
air temperature, as this system cannot cool or
The airflow is directed towards the chest automatically or not activated. Increase the
dehumidify the air.
fan power to clear the windscreen of con-
densation as soon as possible. To dehumidify »
141
Operation
the air, the cooling system will automatically Economic use of the air conditioning ● The air conditioner compressor has been
switch on. When the air conditioning is switched on, the temporarily switched off because the engine
compressor consumes engine power and has coolant temperature is too high.
Heated rear window influence on fuel consumption. ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
This only works when the engine is running conditioner checked by a specialised work-
The air conditioner operates most effectively
and switches off automatically after a maxi- shop.
with the windows and the panoramic sliding
mum of 10 minutes.
sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has
Special characteristics
It should be switched off as soon as the glass heated up after standing in the sun for some
is demisted. By saving electrical power you time, the air inside can be cooled more quick- If the humidity and temperature outside the
can also save fuel. ly by opening the windows and the panoram- vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
ic sliding sunroof briefly. the evaporator in the cooling system and
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
automatic temporary disconnection of this normal and does not indicate a leak!
Change the temperature unit (Climatron-
function is possible, coming back on when
ic)
normal operating conditions are re-establish- Note
ed. The temperature display can be changed
from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of After starting the engine, any residual hu-
the Infotainment system using the Infotain- midity in the air conditioner could mist over
Air recirculation
ment button / > Settings > Units. the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-
››› page 143 tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-
screen of condensation.
The cooling system cannot be activated
Seat heating
If the air conditioning system cannot be
››› page 143 switched on, this may be caused by the fol-
lowing:
Air vents
Climate control usage instructions ● The engine is not running. To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-
lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must
● The fan is switched off.
The interior cooling system only works when remain open.
● The air conditioner fuse has blown.
the engine is running and fan is switched on.
● To close the air vents on the left side, move
● The outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +3°C (+38°F). the corresponding diffuser vent lever fully to
the right. To close the air vents on the rights
side, move the corresponding diffuser vent
lever fully to the left.
142
Air conditioning
● Change the air direction using the ventila- WARNING ● If the function is not deactivated by
tion grille lever. pressing the button, it will deactivate after
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-
approximately 20 minutes.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air duction on page 139.
vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in ● If the cooling system is switched off and
the rear area of the passenger compartment. air recirculation mode switched on, the
windows can mist over very quickly, con- Seat heating
Note siderably limiting visibility.
● Switch air recirculation mode off when it
The seat cushions can be heated electrically
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen-
is not required. when the ignition is switched on. The backrest
sitive objects should never be placed in
is also heated in some versions.
front of the air outlets as they may be dam-
aged or made unsuitable for use by the air. CAUTION Control seat heating
Do not smoke when air recirculation is ● Press buttons or on the control panel
switched on in vehicles with an air condi-
to turn on the seat heating as high as possi-
Air recirculation tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the
ble.
cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and ● Press buttons or repeatedly to adjust it
air from entering the interior. pollen filter, leading to a permanently un- to the required level.
pleasant smell. ● To turn off the seat heating, press button
When the outside temperature is very high,
selecting manual air recirculation mode for a or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.
short period refreshes the vehicle interior Note
more quickly. Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-
Cases in which the heat seating should
vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant not be switched on
For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is
switched off when the button is pressed odours from entering the vehicle interior Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the
when it is in reverse and while the automat- following conditions are met:
or the air distributor is turned to .
ic windscreen wiper is working.
● The seat is not occupied.
Switching the manual air recirculation
Note ● The seat has a cover.
mode on and off
If the temperature regulator is turned to the ● A child seat has been installed on the seat.
● Press the button to connect or discon-
nect manual air recirculation. coldest setting (blue point), the air recircu- ● The seat cushion is wet or damp.
lation function and the button are auto-
● The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-
matically activated.
er than +25°C (77°F). »
143
Operation
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can
adversely affect the operation of the seat
heating, increasing the risk of burns.
● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
using the seat heater.
● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.
● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
on the seat.
● Do not spill liquid on the seat.
CAUTION
● To avoid damaging the heating elements
of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on
the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single
point on the seat cushion or backrest.
144
Introduction
Infotainment system Current documentation attached Radio stations and owners of data media and
audio sources are responsible for the infor-
For using infotainment and its components,
take into account, together with this instruc- mation they transmit.
Introduction tion manual, the following documentation: Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall
buildings, mountains or due to the operation
● Supplements to your vehicle’s on-board
of other electrical devices, such as chargers,
First steps documentation.
can also interfere with the reception of the ra-
● Instruction Manual of the mobile phone de- dio signal.
Introduction vice or audio sources.
Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the
● Operating instructions for data media and
Infotainment functions and settings depend antenna and on the window panes can inter-
external players. fere with radio reception.
on the country and equipment
● Manuals for the Infotainment accessories
Before first use subsequently installed or used additionally. WARNING
Before the first use, bear in mind the following ● Description of services when running SEAT The infotainment central computer is inter-
points, to take full advantage of the functions CONNECT services. connected with the control units mounted
and settings offered: on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious
danger of accident and injury if the central
● Observe the basic safety warnings computer is repaired or disassembled and
Safety instructions reassembled incorrectly.
››› page 145.
● Reset the Infotainment factory settings. Some function areas may include links to ● Never replace the central computer with
third-party websites. SEAT, S.A. is not the another used, recycled or from another ve-
● Search and store favourite radio stations on
owner of the third-party websites accessible hicle at the end of its useful life.
the preset buttons so you can tune them
through the links, and assumes no liability for ● The repair or disassembly and reassem-
quickly.
their content. bly of the central computer should only be
● Use only suitable audio sources and data carried out at specialised workshops. SEAT
media. Some function areas may include outside in- recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
formation from third-party providers. SEAT, this.
● Pair a mobile phone to use phone manage-
S.A. is not responsible for such information
ment through the Infotainment system.
being correct, up-to-date or complete, or for
● Use current maps for navigation. ensuring it does not infringe the rights of third
WARNING
● Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the cor- parties. The factory assembled radio with integra-
responding services. ted software is interconnected with the
control units mounted on the vehicle. »
145
Infotainment system
Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci- at all times (e.g. emergency services si- connected to the telephone interface of
dent and injury if the radio is repaired or rens). the vehicle, inside it there is an “unlocked”
disassembled and reassembled incorrect- ● Hearing may be impaired if using too high SIM card with sufficient balance to make
ly. a volume setting, even if only for short peri- calls and with sufficient network signal
● Never replace the radio with another ra- ods of time. coverage.
dio that is used, recycled or from another
vehicle at the end of its useful life. WARNING
WARNING
● The repair or disassembly and reassem-
The following circumstances may result in Read and observe the operating instruc-
bly of the radio should only be carried out tions provided by the manufacturer in
at specialised workshops. SEAT recom- an emergency call, phone call or data
transmission not being made or being inter- question when using mobile phone devices,
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. data media, external devices, external au-
rupted:
dio and multimedia sources.
● When in areas with zero or insufficient
WARNING
mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also in
Any distraction affecting the driver in any tunnels, confined areas between very tall WARNING
way can lead to an accident and cause in- buildings, garages, underpasses, moun- Position the connection cables of the audio
juries. Reading the information on the tains and valleys. sources and external devices so that they
screen and managing the infotainment sys- ● When in areas with sufficient mobile do not interfere with the driver.
tem can distract your attention from traffic phone or GPS signal, the telephony net-
and cause an accident. work of the telecommunications provider
● Always drive as carefully and responsibly
WARNING
has interference or is not available.
as possible. ● When the vehicle components necessary When changing or connecting an audio or
to make emergency calls, phone calls and multimedia source may cause sudden
to transmit data are damaged, do not work changes in the volume.
WARNING
or do not have sufficient electrical power. ● Lower the volume before connecting or
Connecting, inserting or removing an audio switching to audio or multimedia sources.
● When the battery of the mobile phone
source or data media while driving can dis-
tract your attention from the traffic and device is discharged or its charge level is
cause an accident. insufficient. WARNING
If mobile phone and radiocommunication
WARNING WARNING devices are used without connection to an
In some countries and some telephone net- external antenna, the maximum electro-
Select volume settings that allow you to magnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle
easily hear signals from outside the vehicle works it is only possible to make an emer-
gency call, if a mobile telephone device is might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to
the health of the driver and passengers.
146
Introduction
This is also the case if the external antenna WARNING ● When the speakers and the vehicle com-
has not been correctly installed. ponents necessary for radio reception are
The centre armrest may obstruct the driv-
● Keep a distance of at least 20 centime- damaged, do not work or do not have suffi-
er's arm movements, which could cause an
tres between the antennas of the mobile cient electrical power.
accident and severe injuries.
phone device and an active medical de- ● Keep the storage compartments of the
● When the infotainment is switched off.
vice, such as a pacemaker, as mobile
centre armrest closed at all times while the
phones might alter the functioning of these
vehicle is in motion. WARNING
devices.
● Do not carry a mobile phone switched on Switch off mobile phone devices in areas
very close or directly on top of an active
WARNING with a risk of explosion!
medical device, for instance in a chest If the light conditions are not good and the
pocket. screen is damaged or dirty, the indications WARNING
● Immediately turn off the mobile phone if and information displayed on the screen
The driving recommendations and traffic
you suspect it is causing interferences in an may not be read or be read incorrectly.
indications shown on the navigation system
active medical device or any other medical ● The indications and information dis- may differ from the current traffic situation.
device. played on the screen should never induce
● Traffic signs, signalling systems, traffic
to take any risk that compromises safety.
regulations and local circumstances pre-
The screen is not a replacement for driver
WARNING vail over driving recommendations and
awareness.
Mobile phones, external devices and ac- navigation system indications.
cessories that are loose or not properly se- ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
cured could move around the passenger
WARNING visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
compartment during a sudden driving or Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz- tions.
braking manoeuvre or an accident and ard announcements. The following condi- ● Certain circumstances can significantly
cause damage or injury. tions prevent such notices from being re- initially planned lengthen both the duration
● Set mobile phone devices, external devi- ceived or issued: of the trip and the route to the destination,
ces and their accessories outside the air- ● When in areas with zero or insufficient ra- or even temporarily prevent navigation to
bag deployment areas or store them se- dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas it, for example, if a road is closed to traffic.
curely. between very tall buildings, garages, un-
derpasses, mountains and valleys.
Note
● When the frequency bands of the radio
In areas where special regulations apply or
station have interference or are not availa-
the use of mobile phones is forbidden, the
ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re-
mobile device in question must be switched
ception.
off at all times. The radiation produced by »
147
Infotainment system
Note
If the playback volume is excessive or dis-
torted, the speakers may be damaged.
148
Introduction
149
Infotainment system
Media System
150
Introduction
General instructions for use ● If a function button is missing on the screen, switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt battery
it is not a device defect, but corresponds to charge level is low.
the specific equipment of the country or ver- ● On vehicles with park assist, the audio
Operating indications sion. source volume is automatically lowered when
● The infotainment needs a few seconds for ● Some infotainment functions can only be reverse gear is selected, as well as when the
the complete start-up of the system and dur- selected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In doors are opened. The volume reduction can
ing that time it does not react to inputs. Only some countries, the selector lever must also be adjusted.
the image of the rear view camera system be in the parking position P or in neutral posi- ● Information about the included software
can be displayed during system start-up. tion N. It is not a malfunction, but is due to and the license conditions can be found in
compliance with legal provisions. Settings > Copyright.
● The display of all indications and the exe-
cution of functions only takes place once the ● Restrictions on the use of devices using ● When selling or lending the vehicle, make
infotainment system has finished booting. The Bluetooth® technology may apply in some sure that all saved data, files and settings
duration of the system booting depends on countries. For further information, contact the have been deleted and, if necessary, external
the number of infotainment functions and local authorities. audio sources and data media have been re-
may take longer than normal in the event of ● If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turn moved.
very high or very low temperatures. on the ignition before restarting the infotain-
● When using the infotainment system and ment system. Note
corresponding accessories, e.g., head- ● If the setup is changed, this may change You will find more information and tips for
phones, bear in mind country-specific regu- the display on the screen and in some cases, using the infotainment system in the Help
lations and legal provisions. the infotainment system may behave in a menu.
● Some functions of the infotainment system manner different to that described in this in-
require an active SEAT CONNECT user ac- struction manual.
count and an Internet connection for the ve- ● Ensure that any repairs or modifications HOME screen
hicle. The data transmission must not be limi- that need to be carried out on the infotain-
ted to perform the functions. ment system are carried out by a specialised In the control and display unit you can set up
● To use the infotainment system, simply workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT the views and representation on the home
lightly press a button or touch the screen. dealership for this. screen or use the factory setting templates.
● For the correct operation of the infotain- ● Using a mobile phone device inside the ve- If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a
ment system it is important that it is switched hicle may cause noise in the speakers. device defect, but corresponds to the specific
on and that, if necessary, the time and date ● In some countries, the infotainment system equipment of the country or version.
of the vehicle are set correctly. automatically shuts off when the engine is The following menus can be included as an
icon on the home screen: »
151
Infotainment system
Main menus on the home screen Depending on the equipment, the infotain- Moving objects and adjusting volume
Navigation ››› page 178 ment system has different controls: Move objects on the screen to adapt settings,
● Touch screen. for example, with scrollable buttons or to
Radio ››› page 171, Multimedia move the areas of a menu.
››› page 175
● Touch zones outside the screen, for exam-
ple, Volume (+ -). Depending on the equipment, menus and
Telephone ››› page 185
● Function buttons, for example, RADIO or displays can be customised.
MEDIA.
Full Link ››› page 162 Increasing and reducing images or map
Help Menu sizes
Setup ››› page 153 This menu displays information on the opera- Tip: use your thumb and index finger.
Vehicle ››› page 92 tion of the infotainment system and gives
practical tips.
● Press on the map with both fingers at the
same time and leave them on the screen.
Data ››› page 91 ● Press Help. ● To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin-
Air conditioning ››› page 138 Connecting and disconnecting the info-
ger from the other. To reduce views, slowly
bring one finger towards the other.
Sound tainment system
Note
The infotainment system turns on when the
Users ignition is switched on, unless it has been If you turn on the infotainment system man-
manually turned off beforehand. ually with the ignition off, it will automati-
Store The infotainment system starts-up with the
cally turn off after about 30 minutes.
152
Introduction
Sound settings
Settings (system and sound) Adjust the volume of external audio sour-
Accessing the sound settings: press Sound ces
The selection of possible settings varies de- In the sound settings there may be the follow- If you need to increase the playback volume
pending on the country, the equipment in ing functions, information and setting options: for the external audio source, first lower the
question and the equipment of the vehicle. volume on the infotainment system.
● Equaliser.
If the sound from the connected audio source
● Position.
is very low, increase the output volume on
● Settings. the external audio source. If this is not »
153
Infotainment system
enough, change the input volume to medi- may damage the equipment and “darken”
● Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
um or high. the screen. Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.iPod®, iPad® and
iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc.
If the sound from the connected external au-
dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the ● MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are certi-
output volume on the external audio source. Trademarks, licenses and copy- fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor-
If this is not enough, change the input vol- tium LLC.
rights
ume to medium or low. ● Windows® is a registered trademark of Mi-
Registered trademarks and licenses crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA.
Certain terms in this manual bear the symbol ● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology
Clean the screen ® or ™. These symbols indicate that it is a and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS.
trademark or a registered trademark. The ab- ● This product is protected by certain Micro-
Remove persistent dirt carefully and without
sence of this symbol, however, does not nec- soft Corporation industrial and intellectual
using aggressive cleaning products. To clean
essarily mean that the term in question can property rights. The use or commercialization
the screen we recommend that:
be used freely. of technology of this type outside the config-
● The infotainment system is switched off. uration of this product, without a licence from
Other product names are registered trade-
Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft branch
● Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa- marks or trademarks of the respective rights
is prohibited.
ter ››› page 293. holders.
● In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by Copyright
● Manufactured under license from Dolby
moistening with a little water. Then carefully Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-
remove with a clean, soft cloth. As a general rule, audio and video files stored
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. on data media and audio sources are subject
CAUTION ● Manufactured under license from Dolby to intellectual property protection in accord-
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- ance with the national and international pro-
Cleaning the screen with inappropriate bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. visions applicable in each case. Please bear
cleaning products or when dry, may dam- in mind all legal provisions!
● Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
age it.
● When cleaning, only press lightly. ● Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple
Inc.
● Do not use aggressive cleaning products
or that contain solvents. Such products
154
Introduction
156
Data transfer
Connectivity statuses
Data transfer CAUTION
(white) Full connectivity, all services active The vehicle may be damaged by factors
SEAT CONNECT Limited connectivity, some services
outside the control of SEAT, S.A. These
damaged can include:
(grey) may not be available.
● Misuse of mobile terminals
Introduction
No connectivity, no services availa- ● Data loss during transmission.
no icon
ble.
To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be activa- ● Unsuitable or defective third party appli-
ted online by entering into a SEAT CONNECT SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition or search cations.
contract with SEAT, S.A. and is subject to a technology does not recognise or offer re- ● Malicious software on data storage devi-
temporary use limitation depending on the sults for all words. ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones.
country.
There are SEAT CONNECT services for which
Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfolios registration is mandatory and others for
offered by SEAT and individual services can which it is not mandatory. Services portfolio
be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reacti-
vated, renamed and extended, even without The initial service allocation shown here cor-
Description of services
prior notification. responds to the third generation of SEAT
Before running SEAT CONNECT services, CONNECT services and represents the maxi-
In https://my.seat you can create the user read and take into account the description of mum services portfolio. The maximum possi-
account, see the description of services and the corresponding services. Descriptions are ble portfolio is only available on some vehicle
more information. updated non-periodically and are available models. During the useful life of the vehicle,
The execution and availability of the SEAT online at https://my.seat. you can change the assignment shown here.
CONNECT services and service portfolios
● Always use the most up-to-date version of After activating the services management in
may vary depending on the country, as well
the corresponding service description. the infotainment system you can check if the
as the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi-
vehicle has services and what they are.
ty.
WARNING
In some countries and in the event of a con-
In areas with insufficient mobile phone and tract renewal, the services offered may be
GPS coverage, neither emergency calls or combined differently than indicated here.
phone calls can be made, and data cannot They may also vary depending on the year of
be transmitted. Change location if possi- production of the vehicle. The services men-
ble.
tioned correspond to the third generation of
SEAT CONNECT. »
157
Infotainment system
● Create a user account at https://my.seat or More information at https://my.seat/faqs. 9.2” Infotainment system
directly through the infotainment system in To become a main user and thus prove own-
the User Management menu. S-PIN ership of the vehicle, you need both of the ve-
● Place the SEAT CONNECT order and acti- The S-PIN is a sequence of several digits, hicle’s physical keys. Ownership accredita-
vate it. which can be selected when completed the tion takes place in the vehicle during registra-
● Add the vehicle to your user account. SEAT CONNECT registration. tion or, if you already have a SEAT CONNECT
user account, you must log in through the in-
● Prove ownership. When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-
fotainment system and then go to Manage
● Prove your identity. It is only necessary if guess number sequences and known dates
users
you are to run SEAT CONNECT services rele- of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the SEAT
vant to security. CONNECT user account in “Account set- ● Switch on the ignition and the infotainment
tings”. system.
● You can activate it at https://my.seat or di-
rectly through the infotainment system. To The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro- ● In the infotainment system, register in SEAT
activate it through the infotainment system, tect your user profile or to run a SEAT CON- CONNECT.
proceed as follows: NECT service relevant to the security of your ● Or: open the menu Manage users > Set-
vehicle. tings > Become primary user and follow the
9.2" HOME > Manage users > Become pri-
You must manage this S-PIN with absolute instructions.
mary user.
confidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to third ● Press the unlock button on the first vehicle
8.25" MENU > Settings > SEAT Connect > parties, for security reasons you must change key.
Settings it immediately. ● Press the unlock button on the second vehi-
Follow the rest of the indications and the in- cle key.
formation shown in the infotainment system.
During activation, you may be asked to cre- Ownership and identity accredita- 8.25” Infotainment system
ate an S-PIN. tion To become the main user and therefore ac-
credit ownership of the vehicle, you will need
Update option Depending on the Infotainment system, the
the registration code found on the SEAT Web
ownership accreditation method will be the
9.2” Infotainment yes Portal and in the APP after linking the vehicle
2-key method or the registration code meth-
to your account (My Garage > Add Vehicle
8.25” Infotainment yes od.
> Accept terms and conditions and SEAT
SEAT CONNECT portal yes privacy policy). Ownership is accredited in-
side the vehicle. Go to Vehicle settings >
SEAT CONNECT application yes SEAT CONNECT > Registration and enter »
159
Infotainment system
the registration code shown on the Web Por- Legal provisions Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehi-
tal or in the App. cle occupants if they agree with the activa-
During the use of SEAT CONNECT services, ted services. If they do not, deactivate the
Once the infotainment system has processed
information is transferred and processed on- service in question (if possible) or do not al-
the orders by radiofrequency, the accredita-
line through the vehicle. Such data can also low the occupants to use the vehicle.
tion of the ownership will have been comple-
provide (at least indirectly) information about
ted. You can control the current status in the
the driver in question, for example, driving be- GPS tracking: marking
SEAT CONNECT portal.
haviour and location. As a contracting party If the vehicle has a factory-assembled con-
in the SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT, trol unit that transmits the its current geo-
How is ownership accredited?
S.A., you must ensure that when your vehicle graphical position and speed, the vehicle
9.2” Infotainment 2-Key method. is used by other drivers (for example, family or usually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the roof
friends), data protection and personal rights console). The absence of the marking on the
8.25” Infotainment Registration code
are respected. Therefore, you must inform vehicle does not guarantee that the control
SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible drivers in advance that the vehicle transfers unit does not transmit the vehicle’s current
and receives data online, and that you can geographical position and speed.
SEAT CONNECT appli- No, it is not possible access such data.
cation
Not taking into account this obligation to in- Personal information
Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident) form, can infringe certain rights of the occu- SEAT protects your personal data and only
pants. uses them, as long as the law allows it or you
Identity accreditation must be done before
you can use SEAT CONNECT services that Users can manage data sending and trans- have given your consent on the occasion of a
are relevant to security, such as the “Remote fers through the privacy mode at any time. use. You will find detailed information on data
Opening” service. Identity accreditation can More information at: https://my.seat/faq. processing in relation to SEAT CONNECT
be done in two ways: services in the Privacy Policy, which you can
Follow-up services: ask all occupants access in its corresponding current version
● In person at the SEAT dealership. on the SEAT website.
The follow-up services need geographical
● You can find more information about SEAT and vehicle data to determine whether the
Ident on the SEAT CONNECT portal at Permanent transfer of the vehicle
vehicle is being used within defined speed
https://my.seat. ranges, where it has been parked or if it is be- If another person has left you the vehicle for
ing used in an established geographical area. permanent use (for example, if you buy a
This information is displayed on the SEAT used vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may already
CONNECT portal and in the SEAT CONNECT be activated and the previous user still has
app.
160
Data transfer
the possibility of accessing the data regis- Note ● When in areas with zero or insufficient mo-
tered through SEAT CONNECT and control bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam-
The services required by law and their data
certain functions of your vehicle. ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very
transmission, such as the public emergen-
tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun-
In the infotainment system you can check if cy call system, cannot be disconnected or
tains and valleys.
your vehicle is assigned to a person as the deactivated.
main user. In this case, you can register your- ● External information from third party sup-
self as the main user of the vehicle and thus plies available with limitations, incomplete or
automatically delete the previous main user. incorrect, e.g. representations of maps.
Faults
Alternatively, through the infotainment sys- ● Countries and regions where SEAT CON-
tem you can directly and permanently delete Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEAT NECT is not offered.
the previous user as the main user, as well as CONNECT services are met, there may be
put the vehicle in offline mode and thus limit factors beyond the control of SEAT, S.A. that
both the communication of your vehicle with interfere with the execution of such services Service management
the SEAT, S.A. data server and the processing or prevent them. These may be specifically:
of personal and vehicle data. Open the settings in Users and go to Privacy
● Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software settings and services. In vehicles equipped
update and technical expansion of telecom- with the 9.2” Infotainment, it is accessed from
Deactivating SEAT CONNECT serv- munication equipment, satellites, servers and Users > Settings > Private Mode (deactiva-
data banks. tion of services). In vehicles equipped with
ices
● Change of the mobile telephony standard the 8.25” Infotainment it is accessed from
The following functions are available in the for the transmission of mobile data by the tel- Settings > SEAT Connect > Privacy set-
infotainment system to deactivate and acti- ecommunications service provider, for exam- tings and services. You can do the following
vate SEAT CONNECT services: ple, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS. in the infotainment system:
● Disconnection of an existing mobile phone
● Central deactivation or activation ● Check which SEAT CONNECT services are
standard by the telecommunications service
● Individual deactivation or activation currently available in the vehicle.
provider.
● The number of SEAT CONNECT services
You can rerun the corresponding services af- ● Interference, disturbance or interruption in
that are enabled or disabled.
ter cancelling their deactivation in the info- the reception of the mobile phone and GPS
● Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECT
tainment system. signal due to aspects such as high-speed
driving, solar storms, meteorological influen- services.
ces, topography, blocking equipment and the
More information at https://my.seat. »
intensive use of mobile phones in the radio
cells in question.
161
Infotainment system
If pop-up menus are rejected during the con- coverage of the network, the loss of data It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica-
nection process, Wireless Full Link will not be during transmission or the improper use of tions offered will work on all mobile phone
available. In this case, SEAT recommends de- mobile phone devices. devices or with all their operating systems.
leting the devices in both the telephone set-
The applications offered by SEAT can be
tings and the infotainment system, and re-
Note modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated
starting the connection process.
● Wireless Full Link may not be compatible
and extended without prior notification.
WARNING with all technologies. To avoid distracting the driver while driving,
● Wireless Full Link (Android Auto ™ and Ap- only certified applications can be used.
The use of applications while driving can
distract your attention from the traffic. Any ple CarPlay ™) is disabled in countries
distraction affecting the driver in any way whose radio frequency regulations do not
can lead to an accident and cause injuries. allow it to operate. Full Link symbols and settings
● Always drive as carefully and responsibly
as possible. To show more information
Applications (apps) To open the Full Link settings menu
WARNING To select Apple CarPlay technology.
With SEAT Full Link, the display of the con-
Any applications that are not suitable or tents of SEAT applications and other provid- To select Android Auto™ technology.
execute incorrectly may cause damage to ers installed on mobile phone devices can be To select MirrorLink® technology.
the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. transferred to the infotainment screen.
● Protect the mobile phone device and its
In the case of third-party applications, there
applications from inappropriate use.
may be compatibility problems. Apple CarPlay™
● Never carry out modifications to the ap-
plications. Applications, their use and the necessary
In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following
● Follow instructions in the instruction
mobile phone connection may be pay per
requirements must be met:
manual for the mobile phone device. use.
● The iPhone™ must be compatible with Ap-
The offer of applications can be varied and ple CarPlay™.
CAUTION designed for a vehicle or a specific country.
● Voice control (Siri ™) must be active on the
The content and volume of applications, as
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage iPhone™.
well as the companies that offer them, may
caused to the vehicle as a result of the use ● Apple CarPlay™ must be active without
vary. Some applications also depend on the
of applications that are of poor quality or
availability of third-party services. limitations in the iPhone™ settings. »
are defective, the inadequate program-
ming of the applications, the insufficient
163
Infotainment system
● The iPhone ™ must be connected to the in- Special characteristics ● Press this button for a long time to start
fotainment system via a USB connection. On- During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection, voice control (Siri™) of the connected
ly USB connections with data transmission the following characteristics are applicable: iPhone™.
are suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay™.
● Bluetooth® connections between the Note
● The USB cable used must be an original
iPhone™ and the infotainment system are not
Apple™ cable. ● The availability of technologies depends
possible.
on the country and may vary.
Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® and ● If there is an active Bluetooth® connection,
● You will find information about technical
Wi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone™. it is automatically interrupted.
requirements, compatible iPhones, certi-
● The phone functions are only available fied applications and their availability on
Establish connection through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de- the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple Car-
When you first connect an iPhone™, follow scribed for the Infotainment system are not Play ™ websites, or at SEAT dealerships.
the instructions on the infotainment system available.
screen and on the iPhone ™. ● The connected iPhone™ cannot be used as
The requirements must be met to use Apple a multimedia device in the Media main menu. Android Auto™
CarPlay™. ● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga- Requirements for Android Auto™
Launch Apple CarPlay™: tion system at the same time. The last route In order to use Android Auto™, the following
● Press Full Link to access the Full Link started interrupts the one that was previously requirements must be met:
main menu. active.
● The mobile phone device, called smart-
● Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a con- ● Depending on the infotainment system you phone from here on, has to be compatible
nection with the iPhone™. use, on the instrument panel screen you can with Android Auto™.
view data from the Telephone and Media
● The smartphone must have an Android Au-
Disconnecting mode.
to™ application installed.
● On the Apple CarPlay™ mode, press the ● With the multifunction steering wheel you
● The smartphone has to be connected
SEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu. can accept or reject incoming calls, as well
through the USB connection with data trans-
● Press to interrupt the active connection.
as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
mission with the infotainment system.
● The USB cable used must be an original ca-
The representation of function buttons on the voice control
ble provided by the smartphone manufactur-
screen may vary. ● Press briefly to start voice control using
er.
the infotainment system.
164
Data transfer
Android Auto™ Wireless: Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi telephone function of the infotainment can and Android Auto™ websites, or at SEAT
also have to be activated on the device. also be used. dealerships.
● An active Android Auto™ device cannot be
Establish connection used as a multimedia device in the Media
When you first connect a smartphone, follow main menu. MirrorLink®
the instructions on the infotainment system ● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
screen and on the smartphone. tion system and the Android Auto™ navigation Requirements for MirrorLink®
The requirements must be met to use Android system at the same time. The last route star- In order to use MirrorLink™, the following re-
Auto™. ted interrupts the one that was previously ac- quirements must be met:
tive.
● The mobile device must be compatible with
Launch Android Auto™: ● On the instrument panel screen you can
MirrorLink™.
● Press Full Link to access the Full link view data from the Telephone and Media
● The mobile phone device must be connec-
main menu mode.
ted to the infotainment system via a USB con-
● Press Android Auto™ to establish a connec- ● With the multifunction steering wheel you
nection that is suitable for data transmission.
tion with the smartphone. can accept or reject incoming calls, as well
● The USB cable used must be an original ca-
as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
ble provided by the mobile phone device
Disconnecting
voice control manufacturer.
● In Android Auto™ mode, press the Exit/SEAT
● Depending on the mobile phone device
icon to access the Full Link main menu. ● Press briefly to start voice control using
used, a Car-Mode application that is suitable
● Press to interrupt the active connection. the infotainment system.
for using MirrorLink® must be installed.
● Press and hold this button to start voice
Special characteristics control (Google Assistant) on the connected Establish connection
smartphone.
During an active Android Auto™ connection, When you first connect a mobile phone de-
the following characteristics are applicable: vice, follow the instructions on the infotain-
Note
● An active Android Auto™ device can be ment system screen and on the mobile phone
● The availability of technologies depends
connected at the same time via Bluetooth® device.
on the country and may vary.
(HFP profile) with the infotainment system. The requirements must be met to use Mirror-
● You will find information about technical
● It is possible to use the phone’s functions
requirements, compatible mobile phone Link™. »
through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™ devices, certified applications and their
device is connected at the same time via availability on the SEAT (www.seat.com)
Bluetooth® with the infotainment system, the
165
Infotainment system
Configuration for sharing a con- ● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32 ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.
characters). The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
nection over WLAN
ed.
The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-
Establishing the connection with the wire-
ed. To complete the connection, it may be Repeat this process to connect other devices.
less network (WLAN)
necessary to enter other data into the device.
● Press the Settings button.
Repeat this process to connect other devices.
● Activate the wireless network. To do this, Configure Internet access
press the function button Wi-Fi > Infotain- There is also the option of scanning the QR
ment system as hotspot. code by connecting the device directly to the The infotainment system can use the WLAN
infotainment system’s Wi-Fi network without hotspot of an external device to establish an
● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the
having to enter the password: select Settings Internet connection.
device that is to be connected. If necessary,
> Wi-Fi > Quick connection to infotainment
refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man-
system. Establishing the connection with the wire-
ual.
less network (WLAN)
● Activate the mobile device assignment in
the infotainment system. To do this, press the ● Activate and check the wireless hotspot on
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) the external device. If necessary, refer to the
function button Enable as hotspot and
check the checkbox. 3 This depends on the equipment and the coun- manufacturer’s instruction manual.
try in question. ● Press the Settings button; OR access
● Enter and confirm the network key dis-
played on the device. Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create the Media and press the Settings menu.
a ciphered local wireless network quickly and ● Press the Wi-Fi > Connect to Wi-Fi menu
The following adjustments can also be made and put a check in the checkbox.
simply.
in the Infotainment system as hotspot
● Press the Search for Wi-Fi button and se-
menu: ● Establish the connection with the wireless
lect the device you want from the list.
network (WLAN).
● Security level: WPA2 encryption automati- ● If necessary, enter the network key of the
● Press the WPS button on the WLAN router
cally generates a network key. device in the infotainment system and con-
until the warning light on the router starts
● Network key: Network key automatically firm with OK.
flashing. If the WLAN router does not support
generated. Press the function button to man-
WPS the network must be configured man-
ually change the network key. The network Manual settings:
ually.
key must have a minimum of 8 characters ● To manually enter the network settings of
and a maximum of 63. ● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the
an external (WLAN) device. »
WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router
starts flashing.
167
Infotainment system
Note
Due to the large number of devices on the
market, it is not possible to guarantee fault-
free operation of all functions.
168
Infotainment operation
activated by means of the activation word. Start voice control Manually ending voice control
Voice control is still available via the ● Voice control activation: say the word that Voice control can be cancelled with the Can-
button on the multifunction steering wheel. activates voice control. cel command.
● Availability depends on the country and ● Multifunction steering wheel: press the
● Multifunction steering wheel: press the
equipment. voice control button .
voice control button twice in a row, or a
● Depending on the content of the phone
The voice control ends automatically, if you long press.
book and to ensure reliable recognition of
the names of the phone book, it may be use infotainment functions, if the parking sys-
useful to change the order of the first and tem is activated or by incoming calls.
last name of the contact in question.
In some cases you can also start voice con-
trol of the connected mobile phone device,
by pressing and holding the voice control
Start and stop voice control button.
170
Infotainment operation
Radio mode
Introduction
In Radio mode you can tune in the available Access the settings ● You have a corresponding data package
radio stations in different frequency bands ● Press HOME > > . acquired from the In-Car store or have a data
and memorise your favourites on the preset volume for your own mobile phone device via
buttons to access them quickly. Online functions in Radio mode Wi-Fi access point.
The types of reception and frequency bands Online functions in Radio mode are only Note
available depend on the equipment and the available under the following conditions:
country. In certain countries, frequency ● For streaming services you need to have
bands may stop broadcasting or not be ● SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plus an account with the provider in question.
available again. equipment. ● Radio stations are responsible for the
● You have an active SEAT CONNECT user content of the information they transmit.
Access the RADIO menu account. Additional electrical equipment connected
to the vehicle can cause interference in the
● Press HOME > ››› Fig. 126. ● Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac-
reception of the radio signal and noise in
count. the speakers. »
171
Infotainment system
● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to TP Next to the name of the station, monitor- Show online radio stations whose pro-
the windows may affect reception on vehi- ing of active traffic information stations gramme belongs to the desired musical
cles with a window aerial. (TP). genre.
Radio equipment and symbols To display the frequency band for man- Selecting, tuning and saving a sta-
ual selection of the FM frequency. Only tion
The functions, as well as the types of recep- possible when the summary station list is
tion and frequency bands available depend disconnected. Select the frequency band
on the equipment and the country. DAB not available. Before selecting a station you have to select
● AM tuner. DAB stations support presentations (sli- a frequency band or a type of reception. Dif-
deshow). ferent stations are available depending on
● Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna). the frequency band selected or the type of
● Summarised FM station list. Symbols on the AM frequency band reception.
● Fusion of DAB and FM stations into one list. The types of reception and frequency bands
Manually updating the station list.
● Fusion of all stations stored in preset but- available depend on the equipment and the
To display the frequency band for man-
tons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta- country.
ual selection of the AM frequency.
tions.
● Select the frequency band or type of re-
● Station logos. Menus in Internet radio mode ception: AM, FM/DAB, FM (for devices that do
● DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that Show station selection. not have DAB), Internet radio.
are emitted sequentially.
Open text search.
● Internet radio. Search and select a station
Show the last online radio stations
heard. You can select radio stations in different
Universal symbols in Radio mode ways. The options vary depending on the fre-
Show the 100 most played radio stations
AM To select the desired AM frequency and podcasts.
quency band and the type of reception.
band.
Show available online radio podcasts. Select via the frequency band (AM and
FM/DAB To select the desired FM/DAB fre-
FM)
quency band. Show online radio stations, grouped by
country. ● Activate the frequency band.
Online radio To select the type of Internet
radio reception. Show online radio stations by the de-
sired language.
172
Infotainment operation
● Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre- ● Select the category by which the stations ● Access the preset buttons.
quency band and release it when you reach are to be filtered. ● Press the preset button and keep it pressed
the frequency band you want. ● OR: press to start the text search. The in- until the station is stored.
● OR: press on a point on the frequency put field is displayed. ● OR: press the station on the station list and
band. The cursor will automatically jump to ● Enter the name of the station you want. The keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis-
the corresponding frequency. list of the stations found is updated while en- played.
tering the text. ● Press the preset button.
The station of the set frequency is tuned.
● Press the station you want.
The station is stored in the selected preset
Select from the station list (AM and
The selected station is tuned. button.
FM/DAB)
The station list shows the stations that are If a station was already stored in the preset
Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB)
currently tunable. In the AM frequency band, button, it is overwritten with the new station.
In SCAN mode the stations are automatically
you may have to update the station list if you
tuned in a sequential manner and each of
are no longer in the area where you last ac-
them is played for approx. 5 seconds. Special functions in Radio mode
cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre-
quency band, the station list is automatically ● To start the SCAN mode, under Settings
updated. Traffic information (TP)
press SCAN.
The TP function monitors the announcements
● Open the station list
SCAN mode starts and the station currently of a station with traffic information and auto-
● Press the station you want. tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is a matically reproduces them in the Radio mode
SCAN function button. or in the multimedia playback that is active.
The selected station is tuned. In the case of
To do this, you have to be able to tune into a
FM/DAB and if the station is available, the ● To select a station press SCAN.
station with traffic information.
best quality reception is automatically selec-
ted. SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned. Some stations without their own traffic infor-
The SCAN function button is hidden. mation support the TP function by broad-
Search and filter stations (Internet radio) casting traffic information from other stations
Storing the station on the preset buttons (EON).
In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered
by categories and can be searched by text. You can store up to 36 stations of different In the AM frequency band or in the Multime-
frequency bands and reception types as fa- dia mode, a station with traffic information in
● Open the station list. vourites using the preset buttons. the background is automatically tuned while »
● Tune the station you want.
173
Infotainment system
it is possible to tune into a station with traffic net transmission, reception is not limited to If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings the
information. the region. automatic selection of station logos is ac-
tivated, station logos are automatically as-
If no station with traffic information can be Online radio is only available through the In-
signed to the stations.
tuned in, the device automatically searches ternet connection of the active infotainment
for stations with tunable traffic information. system. The use of online radio can generate In the Online radio mode, the infotainment
expenses due to the transmission of data system accesses the station logos of the on-
Stations with traffic information are not avail-
from the Internet. line database and automatically assigns
able in all countries.
them to the stations
● In Online radio mode, press and set the au-
Activating and deactivating the TP func- dio quality to high or low to tune the online ra- Assign station logos manually
tion dio. ● In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos.
● In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press
● Press on the icon and then select the
Settings > Traffic station (TP). Station logos
station to which a station logo is to be as-
In the case of some frequency bands, station signed.
Online radio logos may already be pre-installed in the in-
● Select the station logo. If desired, repeat
Online radio is a type of reception for Internet fotainment system.
the same process with other stations.
radio stations and podcasts that are inde-
● OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos.
pendent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Inter-
174
Infotainment operation
Media Mode
Introduction
In Media mode you can play multimedia files ● Video files (depends on the system). Limitations and indications of data media
from data media and streaming services Data media may not work if they have been
through the infotainment system. You can also use streaming services. The
availability of streaming services depends on exposed to high temperatures or have been
Depending on the equipment, the following the equipment and the country. damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac-
data media can be used: turer’s indications.
To use streaming services you need to have
● USB storage support (for example, a USB your own user account in the streaming serv- Quality differences between data media pro-
stick, a mobile phone connected via USB). ice in question. duced by different manufacturers can cause
multimedia playback malfunctions.
● Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobile
phone or a tablet). Access the MEDIA menu Incorrect configuration on a data media may
● Press HOME > ››› Fig. 127. cause the data media to be unreadable.
Depending on the equipment, the following
Playlists only specify a playback order and
types of multimedia files can be played: Access the settings refer to the storage location of the multime-
● Audio files. ● Press HOME > > . dia files within the folder structure. In a »
175
Infotainment system
playlist there are no multimedia files saved. To change to the previous title. Playing audio and video files
To play a playlist, multimedia files have to be To change to the next title. You can search and play multimedia files
found in the storage places of the data media from an available multimedia source in differ-
Repeat the current track.
to which the playlist refers. ent ways.
Repeat all titles.
Note To activate the shuffle playback order. Search in the folder structure
SEAT assumes no liability for any deteriora- To display the favourites list. Multimedia files can be catalogued by cate-
tion or loss of files on data storage devices.
Add multimedia file as favourite. gories (for example, album, artist, title). In My
Top right: Select multimedia source. media this category view is always dis-
played. The classic folder structure of individ-
Features of the multimedia equip- Access the settings.
ual USB data media is also found in My me-
ment and symbols Open the search. dia.
To return to the top folder of the multi-
Audio, multimedia and connectivity: 1. Activate the folder structure.
media source.
● Multimedia playback and control via Blue-
The folder structure of the selected mul-
timedia source is displayed. When My
tooth®.
media is selected, the categories (mu-
● Audio playback in these formats: AAC, Select and play a multimedia
sic, videos, playlists) and connected
ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA. source multimedia sources are displayed first.
● Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1 2. Search for the title you want in the folder
Select multimedia source
and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, DivX structure.
3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264 Before playing multimedia files you must first
connect a multimedia source. OR: press to start the text search. The
(.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 10
input field is displayed.
(.wmv, .asf).
To use streaming services you must be con-
● Playlists on any type of device.
3. Enter the name of the desired title. The
nected to the Internet.
list of the titles found is updated while
● Multimedia streaming (online). entering the text.
● Connect an external multimedia source.
● Multimedia search. 4. Press the desired title.
● Select the connected media source to be
used for playback. If at the beginning of the playback your
Universal symbols in Media mode
selection is in a folder of a multimedia
To start playback. source, the multimedia files that are in it
To pause playback. are also added to the playback.
176
Infotainment operation
If a playlist is played, all available titles 2. Select the streaming service you want. dia file. If the music genre is not indicated in
in the playlist are added to the play- 3. Follow the steps indicated by the info- the music files, for example, you cannot save
back. tainment system. the music genre as favourite.
5. Close your selection with . The streaming service is added to the list If a video file is playing, only that video can
of multimedia sources as a new function be saved as favourite.
Select favourites button.
In favourites you can save titles, music gen-
res, artists and albums individually for play- Save favourites Playing entertainment content in
back. Only multimedia files in My media of the info- the infotainment system
● Access favourites . tainment system can be saved as favourites.
You can save up to a maximum of 30 titles, al- Depending on the infotainment system, vid-
● Press the favourite you want. eos can be played.
bums, artists and music genres individually as
favourites.
Depending on your selection, all the titles be-
Video mode
longing to the favourite are added to the 1. Start playback.
playback. When in video mode, a video can be played
2. Access favourites. on the infotainment screen if this is stored on
Configure streaming services 3. Tap a favourite that is not assigned. a data media, in My media or is sourced from
OR: press on an existing favourite and a streaming service. In this case, the video
Depending on the equipment you can use
old for approx. 3 seconds. sound is played through the vehicle's speak-
streaming services directly through the info-
ers.
tainment system. For this you need to have a 4. Select from the selection list: Title, Al-
premium user account of the streaming serv- bum, Artist, Music genres, Playlist. The image is only displayed if the vehicle is
ice in question and you have to log in with it in stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the in-
the infotainment system. You also need to be The selection is saved instead of the previ- fotainment screen turns off. The sound of the
connected to the Internet. ously selected favourite. If the favourite was video can still be heard.
already assigned, the previously saved fa-
1. Select Streaming as the multimedia vourite is overwritten. A stable Internet connection is required for
source. playback from a streaming service. In this
The selectable options in the selection list case, telephony costs may be generated.
A list of available streaming services is depend on the data attached to the multime-
displayed.
177
Infotainment system
Navigation
Introduction
A global satellite system determines the cur- on the screen when travelling above a certain If the exact destination cannot be reached
rent position of the vehicle and the sensors speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to because, for example, it is in a non-digitised
mounted on the vehicle analyse the routes compliance with legislation. area, indications relating to the address and
taken. All measured values and possible traf- the distance to the destination are displayed
fic events are compared with the available Navigation announcements on the screen.
maps to allow optimal navigation to the des-
Navigation announcements are acoustic indi- During dynamic route guidance, you will re-
tination.
cations for driving referred to the current ceive information about reported traffic con-
Navigation announcements and graphic rep- route. gestion on the route. An additional navigation
resentations will guide you to your destina- announcement is provided if the route is re-
The type and frequency of navigation an-
tion. calculated due to traffic congestion.
nouncements depend on the driving situation,
Navigation management is carried out on the for example, starting the guide to the destina- While a navigation announcement is playing,
screen. tion, driving on the motorway or on a round- its volume can be adjusted. The following
about and the settings. navigation announcements provided will be
Depending on the country, some functions of
played with the newly adjusted volume.
the infotainment system will not be available
178
Infotainment operation
Limitations during navigation Zoom out the view (tip: use your index and Rotate view (tip: use your index and middle
If the infotainment system cannot receive da- middle fingers). fingers).
ta from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnel ● Press on the map with both fingers at the ● Press on the map with both fingers at the
or in an underground garage, navigation con- same time. same time and keep them pressed.
tinues using the vehicle's sensors. ● To rotate the map view, turn your fingers
Change view (tip: use your index finger).
In areas that are not digitised or are only par- clockwise anticlockwise.
● Press twice on the map and keep your fin-
tially digitised on the infotainment memory, ger pressed on the screen.
the infotainment system will still attempt to Saved data
● To zoom out the view of the map, move your
provide route guidance. The infotainment system saves certain data,
finger upwards. To zoom in the view of the
for example, frequent routes and position da-
In the case of missing or incomplete naviga- map, move your finger downwards.
ta, to make the entry of the destination more
tion data, it may not be possible to determine
agile and optimise the route guidance.
the exact position of the vehicle. This may Change view (tip: use your index and middle
mean that navigation is not as precise as usu- fingers).
Delete saved data
al. ● Press on the map with both fingers at the
● Press Settings > Basic function settings >
Roads and streets are subject to constant same time and keep them pressed.
Delete and then OK
change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads ● To zoom out the view of the map, move one
closed to traffic, changes to street names finger towards the other. To zoom in the view WARNING
and building numbers). If the navigation data of the map, move one finger away from the
Select the settings, enter the destination
is obsolete, this may lead to errors or inaccur- other.
and the modifications for navigation only
acies during the route guidance. with the vehicle at a standstill.
Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middle
Managing the navigation map fingers).
● Press on the map with both fingers at the Note
To allow an optimal view, you can also man-
same time and horizontal to each other, keep ● If a detour is passed during route guid-
age the navigation map with additional finger
them pressed. ance, navigation may recalculate the
movements.
● To tilt the view of the map forward, move route.
Move the map (tip: use your index finger). your fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the ● The quality of the navigation recommen-
● Move the map with your finger. map backward, move your fingers down- dations given by the Infotainment system
wards. depends on the navigation data available
Zoom in the view (tip: use your index finger). and any reported traffic congestions. »
● To increase the view in a certain position,
double-click on the map.
179
Infotainment system
Click on a traffic event to open an additional Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur- WARNING
window with further details ››› page 183. ing navigation. Current routes cannot be
If you update the navigation data manually
traced or the route guidances will lead to
Slow traffic. while driving, it may cause accidents with
mistaken destinations.
serious injuries.
Traffic jam. Ensure navigation data is updated at all
● Update the navigation data only with the
times. vehicle at a standstill.
Accident.
Broken down vehicle. Online updating of navigation data
Note
The navigation data of the regions through
Slippery surface (ice or snow). Automatic update of the navigation data is
which you travel frequently is automatically
subject to the privacy settings. In “Incogni-
Road closed to traffic. updated in the background if the Internet
to” mode, no update is carried out.
connection is established and the privacy
Slippery road hazard. settings are valid.
Danger. ● With the ignition switched on, the naviga- Start route guidance
tion data is updated automatically.
Road works. Depending on the country and equipment,
Manual update of navigation data different functions are available to enter des-
Strong wind.
Current navigation data for large regions, for tinations.
Reduced visibility. example Western Europe, can be downloa-
The different functions for entering destina-
ded from www.seat.com and stored on USB tions are found in the navigation main menu.
data devices. Navigation through USB data
devices is not possible. Opening the Navigation main menu
Navigation data
● Download the navigation data to a USB da- ● Press HOME > .
The Infotainment system is equipped with a ta device.
built-in navigation data memory. Depending Select the destination and start naviga-
● Turn on the ignition of the vehicle.
on the country, the necessary navigation da- tion
ta may already be pre-installed. ● Connect the USB data device to the info-
tainment system. Navigation data is automat- 1. Press .
To provide correct route guidance and make 2. Select the desired destination. You can
ically updated in the background.
the most of the functions offered, the infotain- chose from Frequent destinations,
ment system should be updated on a regular The map version is displayed in HOME > > Last destinations and Favourite
basis. System information. destinations. »
181
Infotainment system
OR: press and enter the address in Favourite destinations state of the data and it is not possible for all
the input screen. Save up to 20 destinations as favourites. positions.
OR: detailed address. To start “offroad navigation”, press an empty
To save a destination as a favourite press
3. Press Start. in the split screen when entering the destina- area without position data.
tion.
Frequent destinations Start navigation
Select the destination and start naviga- ● Press .
The destination synopsis uses recorded data
to propose possible destinations. tion ● Move the view on the map until the desired
1. Press and then . position can be selected. The navigation map
Select the destination and start naviga- 2. Press the desired destination. can be used by means of additional finger
tion movements ››› page 179.
3. Press Start.
1. Press and then . ● Press the desired destination on the map.
2. Select the desired destination. The route Note ● Press Route.
guidance starts automatically.
Enter the destination as accurately as pos-
sible. If you enter a destination incorrectly, Offroad navigation
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold
the route guidance will not be able to start “Offroad navigation” calculates routes to se-
the desired destination for a few seconds.
or it will guide you to an incorrect destina- lected destination points using unknown da-
tion. ta. When a destination point is outside the
Last destinations
known roads or position data, navigation
Navigation saves the last destinations to finds the route to the next point of the known
make them available for a route guidance. road and completes the path to the next des-
Start route guidance by selecting
tination point with a direct connection.
Select the destination and start naviga- from the map
tion Start navigation
1. Press and then . The navigation map includes active areas at
● Move the view on the map until the desired
many points that are suitable for entering the
2. Press the desired destination. destination. To do this, press the desired posi- position can be selected. The navigation map
3. Press Start. tion or place on the map. If there is map data can be used by means of additional finger
at this point, you can start a route guidance. movements ››› page 179.
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold ● Press on any point on the map without posi-
the desired destination for a few seconds. Whether it is possible to enter the destination
tion data.
through the navigation map depends on the
● Press Route.
182
Infotainment operation
Start route guidance using contact With an active route guidance, traffic inci- Function descriptions
dents that are on the current route are shown
details
in the route details. Such traffic incidents can Route details
Start route guidance with the saved address be avoided ››› page 183.
The route details contain information on all
data of a contact. Contacts saved without incidents, for example, the starting point,
address data cannot be used for route guid- Hazard information stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina-
ance. Hazard information is shown on the naviga- tion, provided the navigation has such data.
tion map with symbols in the same way as
Start navigation If you press on an incident, an additional win-
traffic incidents. In this case, the source of this
● Press . dow opens providing more options. The avail-
information is another vehicle that has detec-
able options depend on the incident and the
● Press on the contact you want. ted the hazard and has uploaded the infor-
current settings.
mation to the service provider.
● Press Route.
The hazards shown are: accident, broken Open and close the route details
Note down vehicle and slippery road surface. ● To open, press | or swipe it.
If the address details of a contact are ob-
solete, the route guidance will nevertheless Traffic flow indication ● To close, press | or swipe it.
take you to the registered address. Check The navigation map shows traffic flow ac-
that the contact address is updated. cording to current traffic events, highlighting Edit route guidance
the road network in colour. To edit route guidance, move the stopovers to
the destination in the TripView view.
● Orange: Slow traffic.
Traffic information
● Red: Traffic jam. ● Hold the desired destination pressed until it
The infotainment system receives detailed is visibly highlighted.
traffic information automatically if the Inter- Note ● Move the destination to the desired posi-
net connection is established. This informa- Traffic information receipt is subject to the tion.
tion is shown with symbols and highlighting privacy settings. In maximum Privacy ● Remove your finger from the screen. The
the road network in colour on the map. mode, no traffic information is received. route will recalculate.
Tracking or Location level setting is neces-
Traffic incidents sary.
Avoid traffic incidents
Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or The details of the route show the current traf-
congested traffic, are shown on the naviga- fic incidents if the navigation has such data. »
tion map using symbols.
183
Infotainment system
Avoid traffic incidents by editing route details Functions in the additional window: The route guidance follows the selected route
››› page 183. until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case,
Delete Delete a stopover from the route the route is recalculated and takes you back
● Press on a traffic event. guidance. along the most direct path to the initially se-
● Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.
Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re- lected destination.
calculate. Important traffic jams are taken into account
Split screen
Stopping route Ends the current route guidance. in the route guidance, and are avoided if al-
When handling navigation functions, an addi- guidance ternative routes are available, provided navi-
tional window with other options may open. gation has such data.
Possible options depend on the function be- Close the additional window.
You can activate and deactivate the function
ing used.
Add a destination to favourites. whenever you want.
Close the additional screen
● Press on an empty area outside the addi- Learn usage pattern Enable and disable learning usage pattern
tional window. When the vehicle is in motion, navigation The setting is in the corresponding navigation
● OR: press . saves routes and destinations used to auto- menu > Basic function settings.
matically generate destination proposals.
● OR: press Accept. ● To activate the function, activate Learn us-
Destinations are learned based on the time of
age pattern.
day and the day of the week.
Functions in the additional window: ● To disable the function, disable Learn us-
Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the
Show on map Show what is selected on the age pattern.
same time. The proposed routes may be dif-
map. ● To delete saved data, press Delete usage
ferent from the routes of the normal route
Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid- guidance. pattern.
ance.
If one of the proposed destinations is selec-
Direct route Starts direct route guidance. ted, the guide to that destination is started.
184
Infotainment operation
Telephone interface
Introduction
You can use the telephone interface to con- Note Telephone interface equipment and
nect your mobile to the infotainment system
● As a general rule, pairing a device (for ex- symbols
and operate phone functions through it. The
ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec-
sound is played through the vehicle's speak- Equipment features
essary once. You can restore the device
ers.
connection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with the ● Hands-free function.
You can connect up to two mobile phone de- infotainment system whenever you want
● Use up to two phones at the same time.
vices simultaneously to the infotainment sys- without having to pair the device again.
tem. ● Phone book with up to 5,000 contacts, de-
● The availability of some telephone func-
tions will depend on the mobile phone con- pending on the infotainment system.
High speeds, poor weather or road conditions
nected to the infotainment system. ● SMS functions via Bluetooth®: SMS reading,
and a noisy ambience (even outside of the
SMS writing (templates included), SMS play-
vehicle), as well as the quality of reception
back, message history.
can all affect the quality of a telephone con-
versation in the vehicle. ● Email functions via Bluetooth®: reading
email, writing email. »
185
Infotainment system
● Connection to wireless charging option. Obtain information on the SEAT brand Places with special regulations
● Connection to the microphone mounted on and selected additional services related
the vehicle. to traffic and your travel. Switch off the mobile telephone and the tele-
Voice mail. phone interface in places with a risk of explo-
Symbols in the main menu sion. These places are not always clearly
Call list symbols marked. They include, for example:
Contacts.
● To open the call lists, press . ● The vicinity of chemical pipelines and
List of incoming and outgoing calls.
tanks.
Enter telephone number. Incoming call.
● The lower decks of boats and ferries.
Text messages (SMS and emails). Outgoing call.
● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq-
Telephone interface settings. Missed call. uefied gas (such as propane or butane).
Telephone number (company). ● Places where the air is laden with chemi-
Symbols for calls
Telephone number (private). cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal
The symbols may be different depending on powder.
Mobile telephone number (company).
the infotainment system. ● All other places where the vehicle engine or
Mobile telephone number (private). telephone must be switched off.
Start a call or bringing it to the fore-
ground. Fax (private).
End or reject a call. Fax. WARNING
Open contact list. Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a
Symbols for text messages risk of explosion!
Enter telephone number.
The symbols may be different depending on
Mute the sound of the hands-free
the infotainment system. Note
Hold call.
● To open the text messages, press . In areas where special regulations apply or
Continue call. the use of mobile phones is forbidden, it
Start conference call. Activate voice control input ››› page 169. must be switched off at all times. The radi-
ation produced by the mobile phone when
Pass call to private mode Templates for text messages.
switched on may interfere with sensitive
Make an emergency call. technical and medical equipment, possibly
Get help in case of breakdown. resulting in malfunction or damage to the
equipment.
186
Infotainment operation
Pair, connect and manage ● Optional: confirm the data transfer mes- Connect a mobile phone device
sage on the mobile phone device. Requirement: the mobile phone device is
Requirement for pairing: paired with the infotainment system.
Active and passive connection
● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile ● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone device. To use the functions of the telephone inter- phone device.
face, there must be at least one mobile
● Bluetooth® is activated on the infotainment
phone device connected to the infotainment Establish an active connection
system. system. If there are several mobile phone de-
● Depending on the mobile device, it will be vices connected to the infotainment system, Requirement: several mobile phone devices
necessary to have the Bluetooth® menu open you can switch between active and passive are connected to the infotainment system at
or activate the Visibility option so that the connections. To use the telephone interface the same time.
device is visible from the infotainment system. with the desired mobile phone device, estab- ● Select the desired mobile phone device
lish the active connection with the infotain- from the drop-down menu. All other mobile
Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel- ment system. phone devices are automatically in the pas-
ephony with the infotainment system to use
sive connection.
the telephone interface functions. On the first Difference between connection types
connection, the mobile phone device is
The mobile phone device is paired and User profiles
paired with the infotainment system. Doing so connected. The functions of the tele-
saves a user profile ››› page 187. Primary For each of the paired mobile phone devices
phone interface are performed with the
data of said mobile phone device. an individual user profile is automatically cre-
The pairing can take a few minutes. The func- ated. In the user profile, data from the mobile
tions available depend on the mobile phone The mobile phone device is paired and phone device is stored, for example, contact
device used and its operating system. Secon- connected. Calls can be managed but
details or settings. A maximum of four user
dary the phone book, messages or other
functions will not be active. profiles can be saved in the infotainment sys-
Pair a mobile phone device tem at the same time.
● Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi- Paired mobile phone devices are stored in the
ces on the mobile phone device and select infotainment system, even if they are not cur- WARNING
the name of the infotainment system. rently connected. If you perform the pairing while driving, it
● Please note and, if necessary, confirm the could cause an accident or injury.
messages that appear on the mobile phone ● Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a
device and on the infotainment system. If the standstill. »
pairing was successful, the phone data is
saved in the user profile.
187
Infotainment system
Note The Comfort phone interface can be equip- ● OR: press a favourite in the telephone inter-
ped with the wireless charging function face main menu to start the call.
● In the pairing of some mobile phone devi-
››› page 189.
ces, a PIN number is shown on the screen of
In order to use the functions of the wireless
Calls
the mobile phone device. Enter that number
in the infotainment system to complete the charging function, you have to place a suita- The telephone interface shows the call list of
pairing. ble mobile phone device correctly in the stor- the mobile telephone device. Start a call from
● While the infotainment system is in the age compartment. The mobile phone device the call list.
Known mobile phones menu, the wireless will then connect to the vehicle antenna. This
● Press > All and press a number on the list
charging function is disabled. When you improves the reception and sound quality of
exit this menu, the wireless charging func- calls. to start the call.
tion is activated again. ● OR: press and filter the call list entries
(for example, missed calls or dialled num-
To call bers). In filtered list, press a number to start
the call.
Basic and Comfort Telephony
Open the telephone interface
Depending on the equipment, two types of Dial
● Press HOME > .
telephone interface can be used: Manually enter a phone number to start a
Make a call call. While entering the phone number, con-
● Basic telephone interface.
tacts that match that number are shown on
● Comfort telephone interface. Select a phone number to start a call. Differ-
the infotainment screen.
ent functions are available for selecting a
phone number: ● Press and enter telephone number.
Basic telephone interface
● Press to start the call
The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue- Contacts
tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This inter- The last call is dialled by pressing and hold-
face allows the use of telephone functions If a contact has several registered phone
numbers you have to select one. ing the button on the multifunction steering
through the infotainment system and play- wheel.
back through the vehicle's speakers. ● Press and press a number on the list to
start the call.
Comfort telephone interface
● OR: press and enter the contact name in Send messages
Like the Basic telephone interface, the Com- the input field to search for it. Press on the
fort telephone interface also uses the Blue- contact to start the call. Depending on the mobile phone device and
tooth® HFP profile. the infotainment system used, you can send
188
Infotainment operation
and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel- Each time the phone is reconnected, the Call a favourite
ephone interface. phone book is updated. ● Press the assigned speed dial button.
If conference calls are supported, the phone
Send an SMS Note
book can be accessed during a call. If there
● Press > Text message > Enter new is a saved image for a contact, it can be dis- Favourites are not updated automatically.
message and enter the message on the played in the list next to the entry. If you change a contact's phone number,
screen. you have to reassign the speed dial button.
● Enter the contact you want in the search Favourites
bar. A speed dial button can be assigned to a
● To send the message press OK. maximum of 5 or 6 favourites from the phone Connectivity Box
book (depending on the equipment). If there
Send an e-mail is a registered photo saved to the contact, it is
shown on the speed dial button.
● Press > E-mail > Enter new message
and enter the message on the screen. All speed dial buttons have to be manually
● Enter the contact you want in the search edited and will be assigned to a user profile.
bar.
Assign the speed dial button
● To send the message press OK.
● In the Favourites menu, press the button,
then open the phone book to select a con-
tact as a favourite. If the contact has several
Phone book, favourites and speed phone numbers, press on the number in the
dial buttons Fig. 130 In the centre console: pad for the mo-
list.
bile phone connection.
In the first connection of a telephone with the
Edit the speed dial button The Connectivity Box includes the Wireless
infotainment system, the phone book is saved
in the infotainment system. It may be neces- ● To edit or delete a favourite contact press Charger functionality. »
sary to confirm the data transmission on the on the icon in the Favourites menu screen.
mobile phone. You can delete one or more favourites.
189
Infotainment system
WARNING
● Always remove the key from the ignition
Fig. 132 Ignition key positions.
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a
short period. This is especially important if
Key positions ››› Fig. 132
children or disabled people are left alone
1 Ignition off. Key can be removed from the in the vehicle. They could accidentally
vehicle. start the engine or operate electrical
2 Ignition is switched on. equipment, resulting in an accident.
● The ignition key must NOT be removed
3 Starting the engine.
from the lock until the vehicle comes to a Fig. 133 In the lower part of the centre con-
standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be sole: start button.
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
immediately blocked- Risk of accident!
● Lock the steering wheel: remove the key The engine can be started with a start button
from the ignition and turn the wheel until it (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid »
191
Driving
key inside the vehicle in the area of the front Automatic deactivation of the ignition on When entering the vehicle, the start button
or rear seats, or on the centre console. vehicles with the Start-Stop system ››› Fig. 133 flashes to draw attention to it.
In vehicles with the Keyless Access The ignition is switched off automatically When the ignition is on/off, the engine start
››› page 96system, the engine can also be when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- button flashes. With the ignition is switched
started with the key in the luggage compart- matic engine shutdown is active, if: off, the start button goes off after a few sec-
ment. onds.
● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
Opening the driver's door when exiting the ● the driver does not step on any pedal, With the engine running, the start button light
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the stays on, indicating that the engine is running.
● the driver door is opened.
steering column if the ignition is disabled. The time elapsed between the moment the
user starts the engine with the start button
After automatically turning off the ignition, if
Switching the ignition on/off manually and the lighting changes from flashing to
the dipped beam is on, the side light re-
fixed will depend on specific engine size
If you only want to switch on the ignition mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is
characteristics. When the start button is used
(without starting the engine), briefly press the enough charge in the battery). If the driver
to stop the engine, the button starts flashing
start button once without pressing the brake locks the vehicle or manually turns off the
again.
pedal or the clutch pedal ››› . light, the side light goes out.
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
The push-button text flashes
Engine restart feature “My Beat” function also offers additional in-
like a heartbeat when the system is ready for
If no key is detected inside the vehicle after formation:
the ignition to be turned on or off.
the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec- ● When the engine stops during the Stop
Automatic ignition disconnection onds to restart it. A warning will display on the phase, the light of the start button stays on,
dash panel screen. as the Start-Stop system remains active even
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key
with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni- After this interval, it will not be possible to though the engine is off.
tion does not switch off automatically. The ig- start the engine without a valid key inside the ● When the engine cannot be started again
nition is switched off by pressing the lock but- vehicle. with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 196, and
ton on the remote control or by pressing needs to be started manually, the start but-
the sensor surface on the door lever “My Beat” function ton flashes to indicate this situation.
››› Fig. 85. For vehicles with a convenience key there is
the “My Beat” function. This feature provides WARNING
an additional indication of the vehicle ignition When switching on the ignition, do not
system. press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
the engine could start immediately.
192
Start and driving
WARNING Starting the engine ● Once the engine starts, release the start-up
button.
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
Before starting the engine ● If the engine does not start, stop and wait
out due care, this may cause accidents and
serious injury. ● Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,
gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal perform an emergency start ››› page 195.
● Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un- and keep it in this position until the engine
authorised person could lock the vehicle, starts. WARNING
start the engine or connect the ignition and ● Vehicles with automatic transmission: put Do not keep the engine running in confined
operate any of the electrical equipment. the lever in position P or N. spaces, as there is a danger of poisoning.
● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
Note Vehicles with ignition locks oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-
● Turn the key to position ››› Fig. 132 2 .
ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-
● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis-
ness and death.
connect the ignition and, if appropriate, ● Keep turning the key to position
take into account the instructions on the ››› Fig. 132 3 without stepping on the accel-
screen of the dash panel. WARNING
erator.
● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time Do not get out of the vehicle with the en-
● Once the engine starts, release the key.
with the engine off and the ignition on, the gine running, especially if a gear is engag-
When it is released, the key returns to position
vehicle battery might be discharged and it ed. The vehicle could then suddenly move
2 .
might not be possible to start the engine. or something strange could happen that
● If the engine does not start, stop and wait would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
● If during the STOP phase you press the
button, the ignition is switch-
for around 1 minute to try again.
ed off and the button flashes. WARNING
Vehicles with start buttons
● If the indication is displayed on the in-
Never use cold start sprays, they could ex-
strument panel display “Start-Stop system ● Press and hold the brake pedal until the en-
plode or cause the engine to run at high
deactivated: Start the engine manually”; gine starts. revs. Doing this risks injury.
the button will flash. ● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 133; do not
press the accelerator. There needs to be a
CAUTION
valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to
start. After starting the engine, the lighting of ● The starter motor or the engine may be
the START ENGINE STOP button changes to damaged if you try to start the engine while
driving or if you restart it immediately after
steady lighting, indicating that the engine has
started.
switching it off. »
193
Driving
● When the engine is cold, you should ● With manual transmission, press the clutch
strength to steer when the engine is switch-
avoid high engine speeds, driving at full all the way down. If the vehicle is automatic, ed off.
throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk set the selector lever to the P position.
● If the ignition is switched off, the steering
of engine damage. ● Apply the handbrake. column could be locked, making it impossi-
● Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key to ble to control the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment position ››› Fig. 132 1 . ● Never remove the key from the ignition if
Do not warm-up the engine by running the ● Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly press the the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the
steering could suddenly lock, making it im-
engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off start-up button ››› Fig. 133.
immediately, driving gently. This helps the possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-
engine reach operating temperature faster dent!
Emergency disconnection
and reduces emissions.
If the engine does not switch off after briefly
WARNING
pressing the starter button, an emergency
Note disconnect will be required: Always take the key with you when you
● Electrical components with a high power leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-
consumption are switched off temporarily ● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- tant if there are children in the vehicle, as
when the engine starts. onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- they might otherwise be able to start the
ond ››› in Ignition and start button on engine or use power-operated equipment
● When starting with a cold engine, noise
page 192. (e.g. the electric windows), which could
levels may briefly increase. This is quite cause injuries.
normal, and no cause for concern.
WARNING
● In vehicles with a natural gas engine
Never switch off the engine while the vehi- CAUTION
(CNG), by default, the engine starts with
gas, with the exception of the following ca- cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-
ses: trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- Stop system switches off the engine, the ig-
jury. nition remains switched on. Make sure that
– Coolant temperature below -15°C.
● The airbags and belt tensioners do not the ignition is switched off before leaving
– After refuelling CNG.
work when the ignition is switched off. the vehicle, otherwise the battery could
● The brake servo does not work with the
discharge.
engine off. Therefore, you need to press the ● If the engine has been driven at high
Turning off the engine break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. speed for a prolonged period of time, it
● Power steering does not work when the
may overheat when turned off. To avoid en-
● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› . gine damage, allow the engine to run for
engine is not running. You need more
approximately two minutes in neutral be-
fore switching it off.
194
Start and driving
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is not available or has been
Electronic immobilizer disconnected.
195
Driving
Description and operation the display. The engine can be stopped be- ● The interior temperature is very high/low.
fore stopping completely (approximately 7 or ● Defrost function button activated
The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel 2 km/h depending on the vehicle's gearbox). ››› page 138.
and reduce CO2 emissions. ● When you take your foot off the brake ped- ● Park assist is switched on.
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- al the engine will start up again. The warning
● The battery is very low.
cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is lamp will switch off.
● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
stopping. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine automatically switches back on Basic requirements for the Start-Stop ing turned.
when required. mode ● If there is a danger of misting.
● The driver door must be closed. ● After engaging reverse gear.
In this scenario, the light of the
button stays lit1). ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. ● In case of a very steep gradient.
When the ignition is switched on, the Start- ● The bonnet must be closed.
is displayed on the instrument cluster
Stop function is automatically activated. ● The engine has reached operating temper- screen; it is also displayed in the driver infor-
ature. mation system, .
Vehicles with a manual gearbox ● The reverse gear must not be engaged.
● When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put ● The vehicle must not be on a very steep The engine starts by itself
it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. slope. When stopped, the normal system mode may
The engine will switch off. The warning lamp be interrupted in the following situations. The
will light up. The engine can be stopped The engine does not turn off for various engine restarts by itself without involvement
before stopping completely (approximately 7 reasons from the driver.
km/h).
Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri- ● The interior temperature differs from the
● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-
fies whether certain conditions are met. The temperature selected on the climate control.
gine will start up again. The warning lamp will
engine does not switch off, in the following
switch off. ● Defrost function button activated
situations for example:
››› page 138.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox ● The engine has not yet reached the re- ● The brake has been pressed several times
● Brake until the vehicle stops and keep your quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode. consecutively.
foot on the brake pedal. The engine will ● The temperature selected on the climate ● The battery is too low.
switch off. The warning lamp will appear in control has not been reached.
● High power consumption. ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Manually connecting and discon-
Stop system is switched off when working necting the Start-Stop system
Additional information related to the auto- in the engine compartment ››› page 197.
matic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in CAUTION
the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when
The Start-Stop system must always be
in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P,
switched off when driving through flooded
the engine will also remain switched off when areas ››› page 210.
you take your foot off the brake pedal. In or-
der to start the engine up again the accelera-
tor must be pressed, or another gear engag- Note
ed or the brake released. ● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
you can control whether the engine should
If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-
switch off or not by reducing or increasing Fig. 135 Centre console: Start-stop system
ped, the engine will start up again.
the brake force applied. While the vehicle button.
Change from D to P to prevent the engine remains stopped, the engine will not stop if
from accidentally starting when passing the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic If you do not wish to use the system, you can
through R. jams with frequent stopping and starting switch it off manually.
for example. As soon as strong pressure is
applied to the brake pedal, the engine will ● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop
Additional information about vehicles with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
stop. system, press the button ››› Fig. 135.
● When stopped, the brake pedal must be
In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will The button symbol remains lit up yellow
kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle
start up again in certain operating conditions does not move. when the system is switched off.
if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle
● If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-
ahead drives off again. Note
box, it can be directly started up again by
immediately pressing the clutch pedal. The system switches on every time the en-
WARNING gine is turned off voluntarily.
● With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is
● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-
placed in position D, N or S after engaging
cle is stationary. The operation of the brake reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards
and steering will not be fully guaranteed. direction must be reached for the system to
More force will be needed to turn the steer- be in a status to stop the engine.
ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an
accident and even serious injuries.
197
Driving
198
Start and driving
Automatic gearbox/DSG au- Selector lever positions To move the lever to position R, the lock but-
ton must be pressed and held while pressing
tomatic gearbox the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse
lights come on when the lever is in the R posi-
Introduction tion with the ignition on.
199
Driving
Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun- position P. While the key is not in the ignition, ble to move the lever. If this should happen
tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch the selector lever is locked in position P. the manual release can be used
tiptronic mode ››› page 201, to adapt the ››› page 204.
gears to suit the road conditions. WARNING
● Take care not to press the accelerator Note
Selector lever lock pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-
● If the lever lock does not engage, there is
In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range hicle could start moving immediately (in
some cases even if the parking brake is en- a fault. The transmission is interrupted to
from being engaged, and prevents the vehi- prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov-
cle from moving off accidentally. gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
ing. Follow the procedure below in order for
● Never move the lever to R or P when driv-
To release the gear lever lock, press and hold the lever lock to engage again:
ing. Failure to follow this instruction could
the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the result in an accident or failure.
– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the
same time, press the lever lock in the direc- brake pedal and release it again.
● With lever in any position (except P), the
tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 137. – With a 7-speed gearbox: press the
foot brake must be pushed down whenever
As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is the engine is running. This is because an brake pedal. Move the lever to posi-
tion P or N and subsequently engage a
in positions P or N the following indication will automatic gearbox still transmits power
even at idling speed. gear.
be shown on the screen:
● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-
● While you are selecting a gear and the
When stationary, apply footbrake cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-
vehicle is stopped with the engine running,
while selecting a gear. ceed to the next mode:
do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-
The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly struction could result in an accident. – When the vehicle does not move in the
through position N (e.g. when shifting from R ● As a driver you should never leave your required direction, the system may not
to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is have the gear range correctly engag-
“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if engaged. Apply the parking brake and se- ed. Press the brake pedal and engage
it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en- lect the parking lock (P). the gear range again.
gages automatically if the brake pedal is not – If the vehicle still does not move in the
pressed and the lever is in position N for more required direction, there is a system
Note
than about one second at a speed of less malfunction. Seek specialist assistance
than 5 km/h (3 mph). ● If the lever is moved accidentally to N and have the system checked.
when driving, release the accelerator and
Safety interlock for ignition key let the engine speed drop to idling before
selecting gear range D or S again.
Once the ignition has been turned off, the key
● Should the power supply to the lever be
may be removed only if the gear selector is in
interrupted in position P, it will not be possi-
200
Start and driving
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode system is not changing gear automatically If the paddles are not operated for some time
due to a traffic situation. and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection
position, it will automatically exit from Tip-
Using Tiptronic with the selector lever tronic mode.
It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,
CAUTION
both when the vehicle is stopped and while
driving. ● When accelerating, if a higher gear is not
selected, it will automatically change
● Starting from the D/S position, move the shortly before reaching the maximum per-
lever to the right. The instrument panel will mitted RPM.
show whether the lever is in manual or Tip- ● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-
tronic mode (e.g. M4). tem will not change until it detects that the
Fig. 138 Lever in the Tiptronic position ● Push the lever forwards + or backwards – engine will not reach its maximum RPM.
to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 138.
● To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the
left. Driving with an automatic gearbox
Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-
paddles cally as the vehicle moves.
The gearshift paddles can be used when the The engine can only start with the selector
selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic) lever in position P or N. At low temperatures,
positions. below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can only
start with the selector lever in position P.
● Press the gearshift paddle + to select a
Fig. 139 Steering wheel: automatic transmis- higher gear ››› Fig. 139.
sion levers Driving down hills
● Press the gearshift paddle – to select a
Under certain circumstances it may be ad-
Tiptronic gives the driver the option to lower gear.
vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-
change gears manually. ● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right- lect the gear manually according to driving
When you change to the Tiptronic pro-
hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap- conditions ››› . »
proximately 1 second or move the lever to the
gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently
left.
selected gear. This is possible as long as the
201
Driving
The assistant attempts to maintain the speed Activation of the inertia mode less of how smoothly you remove your foot
at which the vehicle was travelling when the Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less from the accelerator.
brake was applied, within logical limits. It may than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130
be necessary to correct the speed by press- km / h (12 and 80 mph). WARNING
ing the brake. ● If the inertia mode has been switched on,
● Gently take your foot off the accelerator. take into account, when approaching an
The assistant can only change down as far
as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-
The indication will be shown on the instru-
slopes you have to switch to tiptronic mode ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!
ment panel , the engaged gear and current
and change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take consumption will disappear and the word In-
● When using inertia mode while travelling
advantage of engine braking and take the down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:
ertia will appear.
load off the brake system. risk of accident!
The gears will automatically disengage and ● If other users drive your vehicle, warn
Downhill speed control is deactivated as the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of them about inertia mode.
soon as the road levels out again or you press the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the
the accelerator pedal. engine runs at idling speed.
Note
On vehicles with a cruise control system
››› page 214, downhill speed control is acti- Stopping inertia mode ● The driver message Inertia is only dis-
vated when you set a cruising speed. played with the current consumption. In in-
● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.
ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-
WARNING To take advantage of the engine's inertia played (for example “D” or “E” will appear
instead of “D7” or “E7”).
mode, simply remove your foot from the ac-
The downhill speed control cannot defy the
celerator. ● The inertia mode will be automatically
laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot
disconnected on gradients steeper than
be maintained constant in all situations. Al- Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged 15%.
ways be prepared to use the brakes! section with less energy) and inertia discon-
● In the case of the 1.6l TDI engine, the iner-
nection (= shorter section without the need
tia mode will only work with the Eco driving
for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption
profile.
Inertia mode and emission balance.
If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile
The inertia mode allows you to travel certain
››› page 206, the inertia mode can be activa-
distances without using the accelerator,
ted in the Normal, Eco and Individual pro-
which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-
files. In the Eco profile, it is activated whenev-
ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.
er the operating conditions are met, regard-
203
Driving
Indications on the instrument panel Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop Manual release of the selector lev-
and have the fault repaired.
display er
Gearbox: System fault! You can
Clutch continue driving in D until
Clutch overheating! Please stop! switching off the engine
The clutch has overheated and could be Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special-
damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to ist assistance.
cool with the engine at idling speed and the Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
selector lever in position P. When the warning driving accordingly
lamp and the driver message switch off, have
the fault corrected by a specialised work- Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
shop without delay. If they do not turn off, do the warning lamp switches off, you can con-
not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tinue driving in a normal manner.
Fig. 140 Gear selector lever: manual release
tance. Gearbox: press the brake and en- from the parking position.
gage a gear again.
Faults in the gearbox In the event of a power failure when starting
If the warning was caused by the tempera-
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle (e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain
ture of the gearbox, this driver message will
and place the lever in the posi- locked in position P. To move it to position N to
be displayed when the gearbox has cooled
tion P. move the vehicle, there is an emergency re-
again.
lease device under the centre console, on the
There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-
right side. Releasing the selector lever re-
cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-
quires a certain degree of practical skill.
ing. Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: System fault! You may Removing the cover from the selector lev-
continue driving. er
Have the fault corrected by a specialised ● Apply the handbrake firmly ››› .
workshop without delay. ● Carefully pull the corners of the selector
Gearbox: System fault! You can lever boot and twist it upwards over the lever
continue driving with restric- handle.
tions. Reverse gear disabled
204
Start and driving
Releasing the selector lever No recommendation will appear if the opti- Note
● Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be
The recommended gear indication turns off
the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed displayed.
when the clutch pedal is pressed or when
down ››› Fig. 140. the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi-
Display Meaning tion.
● Press the lock button on the selector lev-
er and move it to position N. Optimum gear.
● After completing the emergency release,
Changing to a higher gear is rec-
reattach the selector lever boot to the gear- ommended. Steering
box console.
Changing to a lower gear is rec-
ommended. Information relating to different ve-
WARNING
Do not move the lever from position P if the
hicle processes.
Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you
the particulate filter Electro-mechanical power steering adapts
still think the car could move, press the
brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could When the exhaust system detects that the electronically to the speed of the car, torque
move in an unforeseen way and cause an particulate filter is close to saturation, this and steering angle.
accident or serious injury. system’s self-cleaning function recommends Even if the power steering fails or the engine
the optimal gear for that function is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate
››› page 267. the steering wheel as long as the key remains
in the ignition lock, but more force must be
Gear-change recommenda- WARNING applied.
tion The gear change recommendation is an
auxiliary function and in no case should be Steering assist
Selecting the optimal gear a substitute for careful driving. This help assists the driver in critical situa-
● Responsibility for selecting the correct tions. It recommends turning the steering
Depending on the equipment on the instru- gear, depending on the circumstances, wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre
ment panel screen, a recommendation is rests solely with the driver. (counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid
shown with the gear that should be engaged skidding ››› . »
to optimise consumption. For the sake of the environment
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the Selecting the correct gear can help to save
lever must be in Tiptronic mode ››› page 201. fuel.
205
Driving
function when the selector lever is not in the S Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Driving pro-
position, depending on how the accelerator Characteristics
The ACC’s acceleration and braking mode file
pedal is released ››› page 203. When the ve- varies according to the driving profile
hicle is turned on again, the function is activa- Places the vehicle in a low state
››› page 220. of consumption, facilitating a
ted by default to reduce consumption. fuel-saving driving style that is
With manual transmission, the Eco profile respectful to the environment.
changes the gear change recommendations Setting the driving profile
to facilitate more efficient driving. Offers a balanced driving experi-
Normal ence, suitable for everyday use.
207
Driving
Note “irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or environment and reducing your operating
600 miles, please note: costs at the same time.
● Your speed and driving style must always
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf- ● Do not use full throttle.
Active cylinder management (ACT®)
fic conditions.
● Do not force the engine above two thirds of
● The Eco profile is not recommended when Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
its maximum speed.
towing a vehicle. cylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-
● Do not tow a trailer. vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-
ing situation does not require too much pow-
Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600
er.
to 1000 miles), gradually increase power
Driving tips until reaching the maximum speed and high
Foresight when driving
engine speeds.
Running in If you think ahead when driving, you will need
Running in new tyres and brake pads to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take
Please observe the instructions for running-in advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-
● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres
new components. ever possible, with a gear engaged. This
››› page 281. takes advantage of the engine braking effect,
Running-in the engine ● Information about brakes ››› page 235. reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-
A new engine must be driven through a run-in sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.
For the sake of the environment
period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000
miles). During its first few hours of running, the If the engine is run in gently, the life of the Changing gear to save energy
internal friction in the engine is greater than engine will be increased and the engine oil An effective way of saving is to change in ad-
later on when all the moving parts have bed- consumption reduced. vance to a higher gear.
ded down.
Manual transmission: shift up from first to
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km second gear as soon as possible. Choosing
(1000 miles) influences the future engine per- Economical and environmentally the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the
formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it friendly driving highest possible gear appropriate for the
should be driven at a moderate speed (espe- driving situation (the engine should continue
cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce Fuel consumption, environmental pollution functioning with cyclical regularity).
engine wear and increase its useful life. Never and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all
depend largely on driving style. Consumption Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-
drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always
can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi- ally and without reaching the “kick-down”
engage a lower gear when the engine works
cient driving type. The following section gives position.
you some tips on lessening the impact on the
208
Start and driving
Avoid driving at high speed engine can consume up to 10% more fuel move it when not needed. At speeds of
Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed, than necessary. 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%
whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis- of fuel.
sion of harmful gases and noise pollution Avoid short journeys
multiply as speed is increased. Driving at The engine and catalytic converter need to Save electrical energy
moderate speeds will help to save fuel. reach their optimal operating temperature The engine drives the alternator, thereby
in order to minimise fuel consumption and generating electricity. This implies that any
Reduce idling time emissions. increase in power consumption also increa-
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate
automatically reduced. In vehicles without off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices
amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off that use a lot of electricity include the blower
ing temperature after about four kilometres
the engine, for example, at level crossings at a high setting, the rear window heating or
(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return
and at traffic lights that remain red for long the seat heating.
to a normal level.
periods of time. When an engine has reached
operating temperature, and depending on Note
Check tyre pressure
the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off ● If you have the Start-Stop system, it is
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
for a minimum of about 5 seconds already recommended that it should not be discon-
correct pressures ››› page 283 to save fuel. If nected.
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-
the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
ry for restarting. ● It is recommended that you close the
tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
windows when driving at more than
The engine takes a long time to warm up rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-
60 km/h (37 mph).
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
tant emissions are also especially high during ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the
Do not use winter tyres all year round as clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best
they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. plate slip. This causes wear and can dam-
to drive off immediately after starting the en-
age the clutch plate.
gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads ● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the
Regular maintenance Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- brake. The fuel consumption will be lower
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable and you will prevent the clutch plate from
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even being damaged.
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
before the engine is started. A well-serviced
ing transported. ● Use the engine brake on downhills by
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
changing to the gear that is best suited for
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and Since the luggage rack increases the aero- the gradient. Fuel consumption will be
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re- “zero” and the brakes will not suffer.
209
Driving
Driving on flooded roads ● Avoid driving through salt water (corro- Driver assistance systems
sion) ››› page 293.
To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on
flooded roads, take the following into ac- General notes
count:
Trips abroad
● The water should never come above the
Safety advice
lower edge of the bodywork. ● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured
that lead-free petrol is available throughout WARNING
● Drive at pedestrian speed.
the journey ››› page 264, Fuel types. Seek in- ● Responsibility for driving rests with the
formation about service station networks sell- driver at all times. The drive assist systems
WARNING
ing unleaded fuel. are not a replacement for driver attention.
After driving through flooded zones, brak- Focus all your attention on driving and be
● In some countries, it is possible that your
ing effectiveness can decrease if the brake prepared to intervene at all times.
vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may
discs or pads are damp ››› page 235.
not be available or the technical services ● Use the drive assist systems only when
may only be able to make limited repairs. conditions allow. The driving style must al-
CAUTION ways be suitable for the weather, visibility,
SEAT importers and distributors will provide road and traffic conditions.
● Driving through flooded areas may dam-
information about the technical preparation ● In order for drive assist systems to react
age vehicle components such as the en-
gine, transmission or electrical system. that your vehicle requires and also about correctly, sensors and cameras must oper-
necessary maintenance and repair possibili- ate without limitations. Please read the
● Whenever driving through water, the
ties. notes on sensors and cameras in this chap-
Start-Stop system must be switched off
ter.
››› page 195.
CAUTION
SEAT does not accept liability for any dam- Note
Note
age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower
● Keep in mind the specific rules of each
● Check the depth of the water before en- quality fuel, an inadequate service or the
tering the flooded zone. country, especially when it comes to driv-
non-availability of genuine spare parts.
ing, formation of an emergency corridor,
● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,
braking distance, speed, parking position,
or stop the engine. wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re-
● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc- sponsible for always complying with the
tion cause waves that could exceed your specific regulations of each country.
vehicle's critical height. ● The area in front of and around the radar
sensor should not be covered with
210
Driver assistance systems
unavailable or ACC unavailable warning Front camera ● Check that the windscreen is not dam-
lights come on. aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
● Clean the sensor area on the bumper as sion.
indicated in ››› page 295, Cleaning the exte-
rior . When the radar sensor starts correct-
ly detecting again, the message disap- Rear radar
pears from the screen and the functions
become available again.
CAUTION
● If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly ad-
justed, the Front Assist system may give un-
Fig. 144 On the windscreen: field of vision of
necessary warnings and apply the brakes
the Lane Assist system.
inappropriately.
● The operation of the radar can be affec- Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig- may be fitted with a front camera on the front
nal. This may occur, for example, in an en- windscreen ››› Fig. 144. This camera detects
closed car park or due to the presence of Fig. 145 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor
lane boundaries (lines) to provide support for
metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets zones.
the following functions:
used in road works).
● The sensor may not be adjusted correct- ● Lane Assist ››› page 226.
ly if it receives an impact. This may com- ● Travel Assist ››› page 228.
promise the system's efficacy or discon-
nect it. If you have the feeling that the ra-
CAUTION
dar sensor is damaged or adjusted incor-
rectly, switch off the Front Assist and ACC To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
functions to avoid any damage. If this oc- tems, take the following points into consid-
curs have it adjusted. eration:
● Clean the field of vision of the camera
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
and ice.
Fig. 146 Sensor detection zones
● Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
212
Driver assistance systems
The radar sensors are located on the left and ● The rear bumper should only be painted Note
right of the bumper and are not visible from with paint authorised by SEAT. The lane de- ● In order to guarantee good operation,
the outside ››› Fig. 145. The sensors monitor parture warning's functions may be limited
keep the sensors clean, free of snow and
both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- or work incorrectly if other paints are used.
ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
hicle ››› Fig. 146. ● The visibility of radar sensors may be af- other objects.
They support the following functions: fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
dirt, among others. Clean the area in front
ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
● Lane departure warning (Side Assist) of the sensors.
unless you do so very briefly, and always
››› page 232. ● Never use the blind spot detector or the keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
● Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ››› page 233. parking assistant if the radar sensors are ● Fitting certain accessories to the front of
dirty.
the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
Automatic deactivation of supported func- vertising, may interfere with the operation
tions of the Park Assist.
The rear radar sensors deactivate automati- Ultrasound sensors
cally when, among other reasons, one of the
The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen-
sensors is detected to be permanently cov- Rear View Camera
ered. This may be the case if, for example, sors to perform the following functions:
there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the
● Parking aid Plus ››› page 243.
sensors.
● Rear parking aid ››› page 245.
The relevant text message will appear in the
dash panel display. CAUTION
● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,
CAUTION
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can
● The radar sensors on the rear bumper modify the orientation of the sensors. This
may be damaged or shifted in the event of can affect the parking aid function. Have
a collision, for example, when entering or the function checked by a specialised
exiting a parking space. This may result in workshop.
the system disconnecting itself, or at least Fig. 147 In the rear bumper: location of the re-
● A number plate or number plate holder verse assist camera.
possibly having its functionality diminished.
with dimensions that exceed the space for
● In order to ensure that the radar sensors the number plate, or a cured or deformed A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
work properly, keep the rear bumper free of number plate can cause false detections or when reverse parking or manoeuvring. This
snow and ice and do not cover it. a loss of visibility for the sensors. provides support to the following function: »
213
Driving
● Rear View Camera ››› page 246. Temporarily switching off the cruise con- using the cruise control system may cause
trol accidents and serious injuries may occur.
WARNING The saved speed can be exceeded at any ● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is
Fitting a number plate frame may interfere time, e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control is bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in
with the view shown on the screen, as it suspended during acceleration and is then slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,
may reduce the camera’s field of vision. resumed with the saved speed. rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
● Only use the cruise control system on
CAUTION Status display paved roads with a firm surface.
● In order to guarantee good system oper- When the cruise control system is switched ● Adapt your speed and safety distance to
ation, keep the cameras clean, free of snow on, the instrument cluster display shows the the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
or ice, and do not cover them with stickers saved speed and the system status: the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-
or other objects. ditions.
● Never use abrasive cleaning products to It lights up grey ● After use, always switch off the speed
clean the camera lens. limiter to prevent the speed being regula-
The cruise control system is switched on, but regula- ted against your wishes.
● Do not use hot or warm water to remove tion is not active.
ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
could damage the camera. too high for the prevailing road, traffic or
It lights up green weather conditions.
The cruise control system is switched on and regula-
tion is active.
Cruise control system (CCS)
If there is no speed saved, the instrument
cluster display shows instead of speed.
Introduction
214
Driver assistance systems
Adjusting the speed ● Select the speed limiter on the instrument Speed limiter
cluster display.
While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be
adjusted:
Introduction
The cruise control system is switched off.
+ 1 km/h (1 mph) The speed limited helps the driver not to ex-
ceed a set speed. »
215
Driving
Speed range ● The speed limiter does not relieve the Start regulation
The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a driver of their responsibility to drive at the ● When the vehicle is moving, press the but-
programmed speed, from 30 km/h (20 mph) appropriate speed. Do not drive at high ton .
approx. and faster. speed if not necessary.
● Using the speed limiter under adverse The current speed is saved as a limit speed.
By selecting the speed limiter weather conditions is dangerous and can
cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning, Adjusting the speed
The speed limitation can be interrupted at
snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed The programmed speed can be set:
any time by depressing the accelerator ped- limiter when the status of the road and the
al fully, beyond the point of resistance. As weather conditions allow it. + 1 km/h (1 mph)
soon as the saved speed is exceeded, the
green indicator light flashes and an audible - 1 km/h (1 mph)
warning signal sounds. The speed is stored. + 10 km/h (5 mph)
Operating the speed limiter
The limiter is reactivated automatically after - 10 km/h (5 mph)
returning to less than the set speed.
Interrupting the adjustment
Status display ● Press the button.
When the speed limiter is switched on, the in-
The speed is stored.
strument cluster display shows the saved
speed and the system status:
Reinstating the cruise control
The speed limiter is switched on but regulation is not The limiter will re-activate as soon as the ve-
active. hicle is moving at a speed lower than the
Fig. 149 On the multifunction steering wheel:
buttons to operate the speed limiter. saved one.
It lights up green
Connecting Switching off
The speed limiter is switched on and active.
● Press the button. ● Press and hold the button .
Critical warning keeping control of the vehicle and reacting ● The Front Assist does not react to pedes-
If the driver fails to react to the advance to a possible emergency situation. trians walking head-on in the same lane.
warning, the system may actively intervene ● The driver must always be ready to take
in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn WARNING over the control of the vehicle.
the driver of the imminent danger of a colli-
Following a Front Assist emergency warn-
sion.
ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- Note
tion and try to avoid the collision as appli- ● When Front Assist is connected, the indi-
Automatic braking cable. cations of other functions on the screen
If the driver also fails to react to the critical ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- may be hidden.
warning, the system may initiate independ- scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly ● When the Front Assist causes a braking,
ent emergency braking by progressively in- intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. the brake pedal is “harder”.
creasing the braking in accordance with how Have the system checked by a specialised
● Automatic interventions by the Front As-
critical the situation is. workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership. sist on the brakes may be interrupted by
pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving
Driver emergency brake assistance sys- ● Always adapt your speed and distance
the wheel.
tem away from the vehicle in front of you at all
● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle
The system may detect that the driver is not times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions. until it stops completely. However, the
braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In brake system does not halt the vehicle per-
this case, it will increase the braking intensity. ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
manently. Use the foot brake!
dents and serious injuries.
The system cannot prevent a collision, al- ● If the Front Assist does not work as de-
● In complex driving situations, Front Assist
though it can significantly minimise the con- scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes
may issue warnings and intervene in brak- several times unnecessarily), switch it off.
sequences by reducing the speed and the
ing unnecessarily.
force of the impact.
● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist ● Deactivated ● When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto
activated. Exceptions ››› page 219, Deacti- transportation.
vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol- SEAT recommends driving with the function in
lowing situations. “Medium” mode.
System limitations
Switching the Front Assist on and off Switching distance warning on and off
With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist The distance warning can be switched on
can be deactivated or activated as follows: and off in the infotainment system using the
button > Driver assistance
● Using the infotainment system with the but-
››› page 92.
ton > Driver assistance ››› page 92.
The system will store the setting for the next
When Front Assist is deactivated, the indica- time the ignition is switched on.
tion will be displayed on the instrument
SEAT recommends keeping the distance
cluster.
warning active.
Activating or deactivating the pre-warning
(advance warning) Fig. 151 On the instrument panel display: ini-
Deactivating Front Assist tempora- tial system self-calibration indication.
The advance warning can be switched off
and on in the infotainment system using but- rily in the following situations
Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to
ton > Driver assistance ››› page 92. the system. Thus, in certain circumstances,
In the following situations the Front Assist
The system will store the setting for the next should be deactivated due to the system's some of the reactions may be inappropriate
time the ignition is switched on. limitations: from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention
in order to intervene if necessary.
SEAT recommends keeping advance warning ● When the vehicle is to be towed.
active.
● If the vehicle is on a test bed. The following conditions may cause the
Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys- Front Assist not to react or to do so too
● When the radar sensor is damaged.
tem the advance warning function may be late:
adapted in the following modes: ● If the radar sensor receives a violent im-
● In the first few instants of driving after
pact.
● Advance switching on the ignition, due to the system’s
● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
initial auto-calibration. During this period, a
● Medium
● If the radar sensor is temporarily covered status icon ››› Fig. 151is displayed. »
● Delayed by an accessory.
219
Driving
220
Driver assistance systems
● Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or ACC operation automatic transmission, the gear lever must
on roads that are steep, with lots of curves be in the D, S or M position.
or slippery. Depending on the driving situation, the fol-
● Never use ACC when driving off-road or lowing indicator lamps come on:
on unpaved roads.
● The system does not react to stationary It lights up green
obstacles (such as a traffic jam queue). Re-
The ACC is activea).
act soon enough to avoid a hazardous sit-
uation. a) Only on analogue instrument clusters.
● The system does not react to people, ani-
mals or vehicles that are crossing or ap- It lights up greena)
proaching in the opposite direction.
Fig. 152 On the multifunction steering wheel: ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front.
● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-
buttons to operate the ACC
ted, the ACC system could automatically a)It lights up white on the analogue instrument clus-
switch off. Switch off the system when ter.
Connecting
starting off.
● Press the button on the multifunction It lights up greena)
● Brake immediately if the ACC does not
slow down enough. steering wheel.
ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.
● Brake immediately when a driver inter- The ACC does not regulate anything yet
a)It lights up white on the analogue instrument clus-
vention instruction is displayed on the in- (standby).
strument cluster screen. ter.
● If the vehicle continues to move involun- Start regulation When the ACC is in standby, the indicator
tarily after a driver intervention prompt, lamps light up grey.
● To start regulation, press the button
brake the vehicle.
››› Fig. 152.
Setting speed
Note The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos-
To program the speed, press the or
est speed within the valid range (30-210
If the ACC does not work as described in ››› Fig. 152 buttons to the desired speed. The
this chapter, do not use it until it has been km/h), as the cruise speed.
speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5
checked by a specialised workshop. Visit- With manual transmission, the gear lever mph).
ing a SEAT dealership is recommended. must be in any gear except first and reverse,
When the ACC is active, the button can be
and the speed must be higher than approxi-
mately 30 km/h (18 mph). On vehicles with
pressed to increase the desired speed by 1 »
221
Driving
km/h (1 mph). You can then press to de- Switching off ACC settings will be the same as those in the
crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph). ● Press and hold the button . The set speed SEAT Drive Profile.
is cleared.
Setting your distance level WARNING
The distance can be set to one of five levels, Exceeding the speed regulated by the Before driving off, check that the road is
from very short to very long: ACC clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-
stacles on the road. This could cause an
● Press the button and then the button or While driving with the ACC switched on, the
accident and serious injuries. If necessary,
››› Fig. 152. driver can increase speed by pressing the apply the brake.
accelerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen-
● Alternatively, press the button as many
ded until you release the accelerator pedal
times as necessary to set the desired dis-
››› . CAUTION
tance.
If you increase speed using the accelerator
Keep in mind each country’s regulations on Adjusting the default distance level at the pedal, the ACC may not be able to safely
start of your journey adjust the speed of the distance due to the
minimum braking distances.
limitations of the system.
In the Infotainment system, you can pre-se-
● Be prepared to react if required by the
Suspend regulation (standby) lect the distance level when connecting the
ACC from: situation.
● Briefly press the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal. ● Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very
The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed long using the Infotainment system: > Driv-
and distance are saved. er assistance > ACC ››› page 92.
222
Driver assistance systems
Status display Special driving situations The function works at speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph). It may not be available in certain
countries.
Overtaking
When the turn signal is switched on for over-
taking, the ACC reduces the distance from
the vehicle in front to help with the overtaking
manoeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be
exceeded.
The function works at speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph). It may not be available in certain
Fig. 153 On the instrument panel display: ACC Fig. 154 On the instrument panel display: ACC
countries.
active. active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.
1 Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if Be aware of the limitations and warnings de- Stop&Go function
the distance to the vehicle is adjusted. scribed at the beginning of this chapter. ››› 3 Valid for: vehicles with an automatic gearbox
2 Selected distance level 2. in Introduction on page 220. The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill
(0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops.
This information can be displayed on the Avoid undertaking on the right1)
central panel of the Assists view, or in the left The ACC remains active and the message
If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that is ACC ready to start is displayed on the in-
hand information profile ››› page 68. If these
travelling at a speed slower than that set by strument cluster for a few seconds. During
views are not selected, it will be automatical-
the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the this time, the vehicle will move off again if the
ly displayed in the lower central part of the
comfort limits of the system to avoid passing vehicle in front moves forwards.
instrument cluster in a simplified manner.
it on the right ››› Fig. 154.
The set speed will be displayed next to the If the vehicle in front does not move off, the
You can cancel this regulation by changing vehicle can be kept at a standstill with the
function status indicator described in
the set speed or by pressing the accelerator status ACC ready to start by pressing the
››› page 221, Start regulation.
pedal. brake. »
The system can only keep the car stopped ACC system limitations
for a few seconds. After this, the Brake warn-
ing will be displayed and an audio warning
will be played. Press the brake pedal. The ve-
hicle may start moving forward if you do not
do this Accident hazard!
The ACC is deactivated while stopped in the
following cases:
WARNING
If the message ACC ready to start is dis-
played on the instrument cluster display
and the vehicle in front moves off, your ve- Fig. 156 Vehicle changing lanes. One ve-
hicle turning and another stationary.
hicle will move off automatically. In this
case, any obstacles in the road may not be Fig. 155 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclist
ahead, out of range of the radar sensor. The limits of the ACC system mean that it is
detected. This may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries. not appropriate in all situations ››› in Intro-
duction on page 220.
● Always check the road before moving off,
and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if SEAT does not recommend using the function
necessary. in the following cases ››› :
224
Driver assistance systems
● On roads with embedded metal objects ● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direction The ACC does not work as expected
such as train or tram tracks. or crossing the road. ● Make sure that the conditions are met for
● On roads with loose gravel. ● Other stationary obstacles the radar sensor to operate properly
››› page 211.
Pay special attention when using ACC in the The ACC does not react to stationary vehi-
● If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au-
following situations: cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by the
ACC turns or moves over and there is a sta- tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and
tionary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not check the operation again.
On curves
react to the second vehicle ››› Fig. 156 . ● Unusual noises during automatic ACC
The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front
braking are normal and do not indicate any
on a curve, or may regulate the distance from
WARNING anomalies.
vehicles in other lanes ››› Fig. 155 .
Using the ACC in the above situations can
cause serious accidents and injuries, and The following conditions may lead the
Vehicles outside the sensor zone you could break the law. ACC not to react:
In the following situations the ACC may not ● The accelerator or brake is depressed.
react, or may react slowly or inappropriately: ● No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear
● Vehicles that are not aligned while driving Problems and solutions R.
or that are outside the sensor's detection ● The vehicle is reversing.
ACC not available
area, such as motorcycles ››› Fig. 155 ● ESC is operating.
● Vehicles that move into your lane, a short ● The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow:
distance from your vehicle ››› Fig. 156 .
● A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty.
● Vehicles with loads or accessories that pro- ● The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor-
rectly. Take into account the warnings descri- ● The RPM is too high or too low.
trude from the sides, rear or roof.
bed in this section ››› page 211 ● The parking brake is applied.
Objects that are not detected ● There is a fault or defect. Turn off the vehi- ● Driving on an excessive slope.
The ACC function only detects and reacts to cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few
vehicles moving in the same direction. There- minutes.
fore it does not detect: ● If the problem persists, consult a special-
ised workshop.
● People
● Animals
225
Driving
226
Driver assistance systems
check certain functions. They will switch off or the assistant systems menu after pressing display and acoustic warnings, the driver is
after a few seconds. the corresponding button. The Lane Assist also prompted to drive through the centre of
system can be activated and deactivated in the lane if the steering correction lasts more
WARNING these menus. than reasonable.
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in-
trol and warning lamps on page 87. Steering wheel vibration
tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35
mph) and if it has detected the lane limits The following situations may result in a steer-
(system status: active). The control lamp ing wheel vibration:
Driving with the Lane Assist System emits a green light. When the system inter-
● The lane ceases to be recognised during a
venes by rectifying the direction, the control
lamp emits a yellow light. sudden intervention in the direction of the
system.
If the control lamp of the instrument panel
display is off, it means that the Lane Assist It is also possible to select steering wheel vi-
system is connected but not ready to inter- bration in the Assistants menu of the infotain-
vene or it is disconnected. ment system. In this case, when a vehicle with
Lane Assist switched on crosses over a detec-
When you activate a turn signal, the system
ted lane marking, the steering wheel will vi-
temporarily goes into a passive state in order
brate.
to allow manual lane change.
An energetic rotation or rectification of the
Fig. 157 On the instrument panel display: indi- steering wheel by the driver causes the sys- Troubleshooting
cations of the Lane Assist System. tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.
Error message, the system disconnects
1 Lane line detected. The system inter- Driver intervention prompt ● Clean the windscreen. ››› page 293
venes assisting on the represented side.
If the steering is not corrected manually, the ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged
2 Lane line detected. The system does not system prompts the driver through an indica-
intervene. in the area of the camera's field of vision.
tion on the instrument panel display and
acoustic warnings.
Switching the lane assist system on or off System behaviour is different than expec-
If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the ted
In some countries, the Lane Assist System is system switches to a passive state. ● Clean the field of vision of the camera reg-
always activated when the ignition is switch-
ed on. The connection status is shown in the Regardless of the steering manoeuvres, ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snow
Assistants menu of the Infotainment system through an indication on the instrument panel and ice. »
227
Driving
● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- Speed range WARNING
era. Travel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap- The Travel Assist smart technology cannot
● Check that the windscreen is not damaged prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx. overcome the limits imposed by the laws of
in the area of the camera's field of vision. 210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case of physics and it only works within the limits of
● Do not mount objects on the steering the adaptive lane guidance function, be- the system. If Travel assist is used negli-
wheel. tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250 km/h gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious
(approx. 155 mph). accidents and injuries. The system is not a
In the event of doubts or queries, go to a spe- replacement for driver awareness.
cialised workshop. Driving with Travel Assist ● Bear in mind the system limitations and
Travel Assist automatically controls the ac- the indications regarding the control of the
celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane
Assist.
Driving Assist (Travel Assist) In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limita-
● Adapt your speed and safety distance to
tions, decelerate the vehicle until it stops be-
hind another that stops and automatically the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
Introduction starts again. visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
The driving assist (Travel Assist) combines You can override assisted adjustment at all ● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is
adaptive cruise control (ACC) and adap- times.
bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in
tive lane guidance. Within the limitations slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,
of the system, the vehicle can maintain a How to know if the vehicle is fitted with rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
distance from the vehicle in front that is Travel Assist
● Do not use Travel Assist offroad or on
preselected by the driver and remain in
The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the roads where the surface is not firm. Travel
the preferred position within the lane.
multifunction steering wheel has the button Assist has been designed for use on paved
Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap- ››› Fig. 160. roads only.
tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. ● Travel Assist does not react to people or
Therefore, carefully read the information Driver intervention prompt animal or vehicles crossing your path or
about the ACC ››› page 220 and the Lane which approach you head-on in the same
If you remove your hands from the steering
Assist ››› page 226 and take into account the lane.
wheel, after a few seconds the system asks
limitations of the systems and the indications ● Brake immediately if Travel Assist does
you to take over the steering with an indica-
given in the information. not slow down enough.
tion on the instrument panel display and
acoustic warnings. ● Brake immediately when a braking mes-
sage is displayed on the instrument panel
screen.
228
Driver assistance systems
● Brake when, after an indication to brake, D Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
the vehicle rolls without it being desired. trol and adaptive lane guidance function
are passive.
● Keep your hands on the steering wheel at
all times, to ensure you have control over E Inactive Travel Assist.
the steering at all times. The driver is al-
ways responsible for keeping the vehicle in Depending on the equipment, more details
its own lane. may be displayed on the instrument cluster,
such as dashed lines or other vehicles on the
● If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-
road.
ing. The system could interpret this as no
driving activity.
● If driver intervention is requested on the Fig. 159 On the instrument panel display: con-
instrument panel display, immediately re- trol lamps. Operating Travel Assist
sume control of the vehicle.
Displays on the screen
● Always be prepared to adjust the speed
yourself. ››› Fig. 158
1 The adaptive lane guidance function is
active.
Indications on the instrument panel 2 Distance set.
display In addition, depending on the equipment,
control lamps indicate the status of the sys-
tem on the instrument panel display:
››› Fig. 159 Fig. 160 Left side of the multifunction steering
A Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- wheel: buttons for operating Travel Assist.
trol and adaptive lane guidance function
Connecting
are active.
● Press the button on the multifunction
B Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-
trol active and adaptive lane guidance steering wheel.
function passive. The control lamp will light up green. The
Fig. 158 On the instrument panel display: indi- C Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- following warning is also displayed on the in-
cation with active adjustment. trol passive and adaptive lane guidance strument panel screen: The Travel Assist
function active. maintains the current speed and the preset »
229
Driving
distance from the vehicle in front. At the same Take the wheel The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helps the
time, if it detects road markings it keeps the The warning lamp comes on white or red, de- driver when backing out of a parallel parking
vehicle in the lane by moving the steering pending on the urgency of the intervention. A spot and when manoeuvring.
wheel. message is also displayed.
WARNING
Interrupting the adjustment ● You released the steering wheel for a few
The smart technology incorporated into
● Briefly press the button on the multifunc- seconds. Take hold of the steering wheel and the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking
tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal. take control of the vehicle. assistance (RCTA) included cannot over-
● The system limits have been reached. Take come the limits imposed by the laws of
The set distance remains saved. hold of the steering wheel and take control of physics; it only works within the limits of the
the vehicle. system. Accidents and severe injury may
Making other adjustments occur if the blind spot detection system or
the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-
For all else, Travel Assist is operated like the Travel Assist disconnects automatically
gently or involuntarily. The system is not a
ACC ››› page 221. Vehicles without Emergency Assist: You have replacement for driver awareness.
released the steering wheel for a long period. ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
● Abnormal operation. Contact a specialised
Troubleshooting visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
workshop.
tions.
Travel Assist is not available or does ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
not work as expected The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-
to be ready to intervene in the steering at
edly
The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele- any time.
vant warning is also displayed on the instru- Vehicles without lane departure warning: You ● Pay attention to the indicator lamps that
ment panel screen. have turned on the turn signal. may come on in the external rear view mir-
rors and on the instrument cluster, and fol-
● There is a fault in the sensors. Check the
low any instructions they may give.
causes and solutions described in
››› page 211. Side Assist with Rear Cross ● The lane departure warning could react
to any special constructions that might be
● The system limits are exceeded. Traffic Alert (RCTA) present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high
● If the fault continues, consult a specialised or irregular dividers. This may cause erro-
workshop. Introduction neous warnings.
The lane departure warning uses radar sen- Keep the external mirrors clean and free of
sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-
››› page 8. The system does this by measur- hesives or other similar materials.
ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles
and its speed differential. The lane departure
warning will not work at speeds of less than Lane assist Plus.
approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses
optical signals in the external rear view mir- The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by
rors to notify the driver. activating the Lane Assist ››› page 226 and
Side Assist functions. In this case its functions
The lane width is not detected individually,
are expanded as described below.
but is rather pre-configured in the system. Fig. 162 Schematic representation: Passing
Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu- situation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi-
tween two lanes, the indications may be in- vre in a potential critical situation: cation from the blind spot detector in the left-
correct. Furthermore, the system can detect hand external mirror.
vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if ● The lamp flashes in the corresponding rear-
there are any), and can also detect station- view mirror even though the turn signal has
ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an not been activated.
incorrect indication. ● The steering wheel vibrates to warn the
driver of the risk of collision.
Indication on the exterior mirror ● torque is applied to correct the steering
The control lamp provides an indication on and return the vehicle to its lane.
the corresponding side regarding the traffic
situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to
232
Driver assistance systems
The faster a vehicle approaches, the sooner Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)
an indication will be displayed in the exterior
mirror, because Side Assist takes into account
the different in speed compared to other ve-
hicles. Thus even though the distance from
the other vehicle is identical, the indication
will appear sooner in some cases and later in
others.
● in areas with significant gradient changes; Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear
● in adverse weather conditions; bumper ››› page 211 to monitor the traffic
Fig. 163 Schematic representation: Situa- crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of
● in the case of special constructions to the
tion of passing and then moving into the right- a parallel parking space or as it is being man-
hand lane. Indication from the blind spot de- side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-
ers. oeuvred, for example in very low visibility con-
tector in the right-hand external mirror.
ditions.
In the following situations, an indication will When the system detects a relevant vehicle
be displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 162 on the road that is approaching the rear of
(arrow) or ››› Fig. 163 (arrow): the vehicle ››› Fig. 164, an acoustic alarm
may sound if the relevance so requires it.
● When being overtaken by another vehicle
››› Fig. 162 . In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is
● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 163 also informed by means of a visual signal on
infotainment system display. This signal is dis-
with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h
played in the form of a red or yellow strip at
(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-
the back of the image of the vehicle on the in-
erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-
fotainment system screen. This strip displays »
played.
233
Driving
the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is come the limits imposed by the laws of Open the Assistants menu.
approaching in transverse direction1). physics; it only works within the limits of the ● Side Assist
system. The parking assistant function ● Rear cross traffic alert
Automatic braking to reduce damages should not tempt you into taking any risks.
The system is not a replacement for driver If the verification box on the instrument panel
If the rear cross traffic alert detects that
awareness. or the infotainment system is checked , the
someone else on the road is approaching the
rear of the vehicle and the driver does not ● The system should never be used in limi- functionality will be automatically activated
step on the brake, the system will engage the ted visibility conditions or complicated when switching on the ignition.
brakes automatically. traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when
When the Side Assist is ready to operate, the
crossing multiple lanes.
The parking system helps the driver by auto- indicator turns on briefly on the exterior rear
● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-
matically engaging the brakes to reduce any view mirrors as confirmation.
cle's surroundings, since the system often
damage. The automatic intervention on the fails to detect things such as bicycles or When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-
brakes takes place when driving in reverse at pedestrians. ment in the system will remain active.
approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph). After detecting
● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not
that the vehicle is stationary, the system Trailer mode
brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.
Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert are
After automatically braking to reduce dam- automatically deactivated and cannot be
age, the system will not be able to automati- switched on if the factory-fitted tow-bar is
Managing the assist systems
cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- electrically connected to a trailer or similar
onds. Enabling and disabling the assist systems device.
You can interrupt the automatic braking by The blind spot detector with parking assistant As soon as the driver starts to drive with a
stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or can be switched on and off by accessing the trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a
the brake pedal in order to regain control of Assistants menu on the dash panel display message is displayed on the instrument pan-
the vehicle. using the steering wheel controls. If the vehi- el display indicating that the Side Assist and
cle is equipped with a multifunction camera, the rear cross traffic alert are switched off.
WARNING it can also be accessed by means of the as- Once the trailer has been unhooked from the
The smart technology incorporated into sistants systems key located on the main vehicle, if you want to use the Side Assist and
the rear cross traffic alert cannot over- beam headlight lever.
It lights up red
Brake fluid level too low ››› page 276 or fault in the Information about the brakes
brake system.
Do not carry on driving!
New brake pads
For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200
It lights up red
miles), new brake pads have not yet reached
Handbrake applied ››› page 237. their maximum braking capacity, and need to
The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- be “run in” first. However, you can compen-
leased. sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by
applying more pressure on the brake pedal.
WARNING Avoid overloading the brakes while running
● When the ignition is switched on, the sta- them in.
tus of the brake system and the brake as-
sist functions is automatically checked. Wear
The control lights on the instrument cluster
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
light up briefly and then turn off again. If a
a great deal on how you drive and the condi-
warning light stays on permanently, there
tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a
is a fault. Seek qualified technical assis-
particular problem in urban traffic and short
tance immediately.
stretches, or with very sporty driving.
● If the brake warning lamp does not go
out or if it lights up when driving, the brake Depending on the speed, the braking force
fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-
is a risk of an accident ››› page 276, Brake perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be
fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. produced when braking. »
Obtain technical assistance.
235
Driving
Wet roads or road salt Fault in the brake system ● Brakes can overheat if used excessively
In certain situations (for example, on driving If the brake pedal travel should ever increase on slopes. Before driving down a long steep
through flooded areas, in severe downpours suddenly, this may mean that one of the two slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to change down into a lower gear or range.
tion could be delayed if the discs and pads the nearest specialised workshop and have Therefore, using the engine brake relieves
are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- the brakes.
brakes should be “dried” by pressing the member that you will have to apply more ● Gentle continuous braking causes the
brake pedal several times. pressure on the brake pedal and allow for brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
longer stopping distances. tance will increase. Apply and then release
At high speed and with the windscreen wipers the brakes alternately.
activated, the brake pads will briefly touch
Low brake fluid level ● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the
the brake discs. This takes place, although
brake system only in a suitable traffic situa-
unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if
tion. Do not put other road users in danger:
to improve the response time of the brakes the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid there is risk of causing an accident.
when they are wet. level is monitored electronically.
● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be neutral, when the engine is stopped. The
Brake servo
temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for braking distance is increased considerably
some distance without using the brakes when The brake servo increases the pressure you when the brake servo is not active.
there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The apply to the brake pedal. It works only when ● If the brake is subjected to high stresses,
layer of salt that accumulates on the discs the engine is running. vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-
and pads can be removed by gently apply- tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of
ing the brakes a few times. WARNING the brakes.
Any anomaly in the brake system can in- ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
Corrosion crease the braking distance, with the re- could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
There may be a tendency for corrosion to sulting risk of an accident. cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
form on the discs and dirt to build up on the ● New brake pads and discs must be run in accessories please read the relevant in-
and do not have the correct friction during structions.
brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently
or the brakes are not used very often. the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced
braking capacity may be offset by pressing
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust on the brake pedal a little harder.
has formed on the disks, it is advisable to
● If you are driving on roads which have
clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly
been salted, braking effectiveness may be
a few times at a moderately high speed ››› . decreased.
236
Braking and parking
238
Braking and parking
vehicle even when the brakes are on full. again automatically when the brake has of that wheel. This means that the requested
Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not cooled down. trajectory is much more precise.
pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal
XDS works in combination with the ESC and is
pulsate while the ABS is working. Tractor-trailer sway mitigation
always active, even when ASR is disconnec-
If the running gear or brake system is modi- If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-
fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. connected.
verely limited. When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the
vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- Multi-collision brake
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) matically brake the towing vehicle within the
The multi-collision brake consists of automat-
limits of the system and mitigate the sway.
The brake assist system can reduce the re- ic braking activated by the Airbag control
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available
quired braking distance. The braking force is unit. It is activated when, in the event of an
in all countries ››› page 255.
automatically boosted if you press the brake accident, the Airbag control unit detects de-
pedal quickly in an emergency. You must celerations above the activation level, and
Electronic engine torque management
keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- braking is managed by the ESC system.
(XDS)
ger has passed.
In the event of an accident, the multi-collision
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
brake can help the driver by braking to avoid
Traction control system (ASR) tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher
the risk of skidding during the accident and
speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the
In the event of wheelspin, the traction control causing other collisions.
wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-
system reduces the engine torque to match
ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel. The following actions control automatic brak-
the amount of grip available. This helps the
This may mean that in certain situations the ing during the accident:
car to start moving, accelerate or climb a
torque delivered to the inner wheel is too
gradient. ● When the driver presses the accelerator,
high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other
hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower the automatic braking does not take place.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
drive torque than it could transmit. This can ● When the braking pressure through press-
When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-
the spinning wheel and directs the power to case the front axle, which results in under- tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake
the other driven wheel. This function is active steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory. automatically.
up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph). ● Multi-collision braking will not be available
The XDS can detect and correct this effect
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel via the sensors and signals of the ESC. if there is an anomaly in the ESC system. »
from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-
wheel and counter the excess driving torque
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on
239
Driving
WARNING of the tyres can cause the system to re- When the ASR is disconnected, the control
duce engine power when this is not desired. warning light lights up on the instrument
Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet
cluster.
ground can result in loss of vehicle control ● The regulating processes of the systems
and serious injury to the driver and passen- can make noises due to their operation.
Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in
gers. ● If the warning lamp or lights up,
“Sport” mode
● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron- there could be a fault ››› page 86.
ic torque control system cannot exceed the ● In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be discon-
● Any modifications made to the vehicle
limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al- (for example, to the engine, brake system,
nected and connected using the infotainment
ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or running gear or to the combination of system ››› page 88. In vehicles with a driver
slippery roads. If you notice the systems wheels and tyres) may affect the operation information system the corresponding indica-
cutting in, you should reduce your speed of the ABS, ASR and EDS. tion will be displayed.
immediately to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not be encouraged to take When “Sport” mode is turned on, ESC inter-
risks by the presence of more safety sys- ventions to stabilise the vehicle, and anti-slip
tems. If you do, an accident may occur. Connecting and disconnecting the regulation (ASR) are limited. In addition, the
● Please remember that the accident risk ESC and ASR control lamp lights up on the instrument pan-
always increases if you drive fast, espe- el.
cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if The ESC is switched on automatically when
you follow too close behind the vehicle in the engine is started, and only works when WARNING
front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, the engine is running and includes the ABS, The ESC Sport mode should be activated
EDS and the electronic torque control sys- EDS and ASR systems. only when traffic conditions and the ability
tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci- of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!
The ASR function should only be switched off
dents!
in situations in which traction is insufficient. ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising
● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- function will be limited to allow for a sporti-
faces (for example, icy or snow-covered). Depending on the finishes and versions, there er drive. The driving wheels could spin and
Despite the control systems, the driven is the possibility of disconnecting only the the vehicle could skid.
wheels could spin, affecting the stability of ASR or activating the ESC in “Sport” mode.
the vehicle: risk of accident!
Disconnecting and connecting the ASR
Note
Note ● The ASR can be switched off and on using If the ASR is disconnected or the Sport
mode is selected, cruise control will be
● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor- the infotainment system ››› page 88. In vehi-
switched off.
rectly if the four wheels have identical cles with a driver information system the cor-
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius responding indication will be displayed.
240
Help with parking and manoeuvring
CAUTION ● If the parking distance warning system is ● In order to guarantee good operation,
ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- keep the sensors clean, free of snow and
Parking distance warning system functions
ble damage. ice, and do not cover them with stickers or
can be affected by different factors that
● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, other objects.
can cause damage:
● Under certain circumstances, the system
wheel arch and vehicle underbody can ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
modify the orientation of the sensors. This ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,
does not detect or display certain objects:
can affect the parking aid function. Have unless you do so very briefly, and always
– Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences, the function checked by a specialised keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
posts and thin trees. workshop. ● Fitting certain accessories to the front of
– Objects that are located above the ● A number plate or number plate holder the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-
sensors, such as protrusions in a wall. with dimensions that exceed the space for vertising, may interfere with the operation
– Objects with certain surfaces or struc- the number plate, or a cured or deformed of the Park Assist.
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- number plate can cause false detections or ● We recommend that you practice park-
der snow. a loss of visibility for the sensors. ing in an area without traffic.
● Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ● The volume and tone of the signals and
ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- Note indications can be changed ››› page 246.
sors' signals. The system cannot detect
● The display on the Infotainment system ● In vehicles without an infotainment sys-
these objects or people wearing such
screen shows a slight time delay. tem, these parameters can be modified in a
clothes correctly.
● In certain situations, the system can give SEAT Official Service or in a specialised
● Sensor signals may be affected by exter- workshop.
a warning even though there is no obstacle
nal sound sources. This may prevent them
in the detected area: ● Please observe information on towing a
from detecting people or objects.
– Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces trailer ››› page 246.
● If the system warns you of the proximity
with long grass.
of a low obstacle, please note that after
being detected by the system, the obstacle – External ultrasound sources, such as
in question may disappear from the meas- other vehicles equipped with ultra-
urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos- sound systems.
er, and the system will no longer warn of its – Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex-
presence. In certain circumstances, ob- haust gases.
jects such as high kerbs that could damage
– If the number plate is not properly se-
the underside of the vehicle are not detec-
cured to the surface of the bumper.
ted.
– Gradient changes.
242
Help with parking and manoeuvring
As you approach the obstacle, the frequency Automatic connection of Parking Aid
of the audible signals will increase. The signal
● Select reverse gear.
will sound continuously at around 0.30 m:
Stop! ● OR: If you drive forward at a speed of less
than 15 km/h (9 mph) and an obstacle is en-
If the separation is maintained, the warning countered, it is detected when it is approx.
volume is reduced after about 4 seconds. less than 95 cm. away. If the automatic con-
nection is activated, a reduced view is shown.
● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-
Parking Aid operation tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx
depending on whether or not an obstacle is
Fig. 166 Parking aid view on the Infotainment
detected)
system display.
Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
visual and audio warnings about obstacles ● Move the selector lever to position P.
detected in front of and behind the vehicle. ● OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) or
The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an faster.
obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible
signals and in the Infotainment system Temporary suppression of sound in Park-
››› Fig. 166. ing Aid
When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi- Fig. 167 Centre console: parking aid button ● Press the function button.
(depending on the version).
ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve-
hicle or behind it by choosing different Change from reduced view to full view
Manually connecting and disconnecting
sounds. ● Select reverse gear.
the parking aid
The approximate measurement range of the ● Press the button once. ● OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.
sensors is: ● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-
A 1.20 m tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx »
243
Driving
depending on whether or not an obstacle is ● OR: switch the automatic activation on and Visual indication segments
detected). off in the Infotainment system.
Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear Automatic activation of the park assist can be
View Camera “RVC”) switched on and off in the infotainment sys-
tem ››› page 88:
● Select reverse gear.
● OR press the RVC function button. ● Switch the ignition on.
● Select: Infotainment button > Settings
A short confirmation signal will be heard and > Parking and manoeuvring.
the button symbol will light up when the sys-
● Select Automatic activation. If the box
tem is switched on.
is checked , the function is connected.
● OR, in the Park distance control function, Fig. 168 Parking aid view on the Infotainment
select Settings > Automatic activa- system display.
Automatic activation
tion.
The optical indication of the segments works
When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto-
If activated automatically, an audible sound as follows:
matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the
warning will only be given when obstacles in
segments will appear on screen. – White segments: the obstacle is more
front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-
It only operates every time the speed is re- prox. than approx. 30 cm away from the path
duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first or in the direction opposite to travel.
time. CAUTION – Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on
If it is switched off using the button, one of The automatic connection of the Parking the vehicle’s path and are at a distance
the following actions must be taken for it to Aid only works when you are driving slowly. of less than approx. 30 cm away.
reactivate automatically: If driving style is not adapted to the circum- – Red segments: obstacles are less than
stances, an accident and serious injury or approx. 30 cm away.
● Switch off the ignition and switch it on damage may be caused.
again. The Media System Plus or Navi System will
● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) display the expected path, depending on
approx. how the steering wheel is turned.
● OR: move the lever into position P and pack If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,
again. the corresponding audible warning will
sound.
244
Help with parking and manoeuvring
When the penultimate segment is displayed, Adjust volume The screen will only display objects detected
the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In When the parking aid is switched on, the vol- at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will
the collision zone, the obstacles are repre- ume of the audio source will be reduced, de- be hidden.
sented in red, including those out of the path. pending on the selected option.
Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introduction on
page 241, ››› in Introduction on
page 242 ! Rear parking aid
Error messages
Description
If a an error or fault message appears on the
Setting the indications and audio instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a The rear parking aid is an audible assistant
signals fault. that warns of obstacles located behind the
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- vehicle.
The indications and audio signal settings are
necting the ignition, it will not be indicated
in the infotainment system ››› page 88. There are sensors integrated in the rear
next time the parking aid is connected. bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you
Automatic activation If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in are alerted by audible and visible warnings
the areas A and B are displayed on the Infotainment system.
on – off.
››› Fig. 166. If a front sensor is faulty, only the Make particularly sure that the sensors are
obstacles in the areas C and D will be dis- not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and
Front volume
played. Symbol is displayed. the like, as this could affect the system's op-
Volume in the front and rear area.
We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 294.
Front sound settings/sharpness alised workshop to have the fault repaired. The approximate measurement range of the
Sound tone in the front area. rear sensors is:
If the separation is maintained, the warning If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- reality. Distance perception is also distor-
volume is reduced after about 4 seconds. necting the ignition, it will not be indicated ted.
next time the parking aid is connected.
● Due to the screen resolution or light con-
We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- ditions, some items may be blurry or not
Parking Aid operation alised workshop to have the fault repaired. displayed at all. Take care with thin posts,
fences, railings or trees that might not be
Parking Aid connection Towing device seen on the screen and could damage the
● Select reverse gear. vehicle.
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
● The reverse assist has blind spots where
device from the factory, when the trailer is
Parking Aid disconnection it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the
connected, the parking aid will not be activa-
vehicle's surrounding area at all times.
● Place the selector level in position P, N or D ted when reverse gear is engaged.
● The system is not a replacement for driv-
(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-
er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-
verse (for manual gearboxes).
noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area
Setting the indications and audio signals Reverse Assist (Rear View at all times.
● Do not be distracted from the traffic by
The indications and audio signal settings are Camera) looking at the screen.
in the infotainment system ››› page 88. ● The images are only two-dimensional.
Operating and safety warnings Protruding objects or holes in the road, for
● Rear volume: volume in the rear area.
example, are more difficult to detect or
● Rear sound settings/treble: sound WARNING may not be seen at all.
tone in the rear area.
● The reverse assist does not make it possi- ● Vehicle load modifies the representation
● Lower volume: when the parking aid is ble to precisely calculate the distance from of the guide lines ››› Fig. 169. The width rep-
switched on, the volume of the audio source obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- resented by the lines decreases with vehi-
will be reduced, depending on the selected tem's own limits, hence its negligent use cle load. Pay special attention to the sur-
option. may cause serious accidents and injuries if roundings when the inside of the vehicle of
used without due care. The driver should be the luggage compartment are loaded.
Error messages aware of his/her surroundings at all times ● In the following situations, objects or oth-
to ensure safe driving. er vehicles appear to be further away or
If a an error or fault message appears on the
● The camera lens expands and distorts closer than they actually are. Pay special
instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a
the field of view and displays the objects attention:
fault.
on the screen in a way that is different from – If moving from a flat surface to a slope
and vice-versa.
246
Help with parking and manoeuvring
247
Driving
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system bination must be reduced by 10% for every of towing bracket. The towing bracket
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing 1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate could fail and the trailer could be released
bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the the trailer with the maximum authorised from the vehicle.
Start-Stop system operates as normal. No drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing
special characteristics need to be taken into bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-
WARNING
account. it.
Driving with a trailer and transporting
If the system does not recognise the trailer or WARNING heavy or large objects can affect driving
the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by properties and even cause an accident.
Never use the trailer to transport people,
SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- ● Always secure the load properly using
since it would put their life in danger and is
nected by pressing the corresponding button belts or straps that are suitable and in
also prohibited.
in the lower part of the centre console before good condition.
driving with the trailer, and it should remain ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
off for the rest of the journey ››› . WARNING
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
Undue use of the towing bracket may traffic conditions.
Vehicles with driving profile selection cause injury and accidents. ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use ● Only use the towing bracket if it is in a more likely to overturn than those with a
of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- perfect state of repair and is properly se- low one.
ded. You are advised to select another of the cured. ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
available driving profiles before beginning to ● Never modify or repair the towing bracket
● Take great care when overtaking.
drive with a trailer. in any way.
● Reduce speed immediately if you notice
● In order to reduce the danger of injury in
that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.
Trailer weight/drawbar load the event of rear-end collisions and to
● Never drive at more than 80 km/h
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists
when parking the vehicle, cover or remove (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more
you do not load the trailer up to the maximum than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-
the tow hook when you are not using a trail-
permitted trailer weight, you can then climb cumstances). This also applies in countries
er.
correspondingly steeper slopes. where driving at higher speeds is permit-
● According to EU regulation 2021_535 it is
The maximum trailer weights listed are only ted. Take into account the speed limit for
not permitted to install a towing device that
vehicles with trailers in the corresponding
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above completely or partially covers the rear
country, as it could be less than the speed
sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en- number plate.
limit for vehicles without a trailer.
gine performance and the ability to climb ● Never fit a towing bracket “with weight
● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
slopes, the tow load decreases proportional-
ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-
distribution” or “load compensation”. The
vehicle and trailer while accelerating. »
vehicle has not been designed for this type
249
Driving
250
Towing bracket device
Trailer maximum electricity consumption Hitching and connecting a trailer Pin Meaning
Never exceed the values indicated!
12 Unassigned
Brake lights (total) 84 Watts 13 Earth for pin 9
Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts
Power socket for trailer
Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts
The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power
Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts socket for the connection between the trailer
and the vehicle. With the engine running,
Rear fog light 42 Watts
electrical devices on the trailer receive power
from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin
WARNING Fig. 170 Schematic representation: assign-
10 of the trailer power socket).
ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock-
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is
et. If the system detects that a trailer has been
not the right one, the trailer could become
detached from the vehicle and cause seri- connected, the consumers on the trailer will
ous injury. Pin Meaning receive electricity through this connection
(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.
1 Left turn signal This powers, for example, the trailer's interior
CAUTION lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in
2 Rear fog light
● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- a caravan only receive electrical power if the
rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic 3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 engine is running (through pin 10).
system may be damaged.
4 Right turn signal To avoid overloading the electrical system,
● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric
you cannot connect the ground wires of pin
current, the vehicle's electronic system 5 Rear light, right
3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.
may be damaged.
6 Brake lights
● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you
tem directly to the electrical connections 7 Rear light, left will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
of the tail lights or any other power sour- the function corresponding to pin 10 will not
8 Reverse lights
ces. Only use the connections intended for be available.
providing electric current to the trailer. 9 Permanent live
Tow cable
10 Live charge cable
The tow rope must always be securely fixed
11 Earth for pin 10 to the towing vehicle and loose enough so »
251
Driving
that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always ● Ensure that any repairs that need to be
However, make sure that the cable does not turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt carried out on the electrical system are
rub on the ground while driving. sensor could cause the alarm to go off. carried out by a specialised workshop.
● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
Trailer tail lights Trailers with LED tail lights tem directly to the electrical connections
Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED of the tail lights or any other power sour-
they are working correctly and that they rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- ces.
comply with the relevant safety regulations. theft alarm system.
Make sure that the maximum permissible WARNING
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does
power that can be absorbed by the trailer is
not go off when the electrical connection Contact between the pins of the trailer
not exceeded ››› page 251.
with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with power socket can cause short circuits,
light-emitting diodes. overloading of the electrical system or fail-
Include in the anti-theft alarm ure of the lighting system, and consequent-
If the Eco driving profile was selected when ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system
hitching the trailer, this will automatically
if the following conditions are met: ● Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-
switch to the Normal profile. If the system
er socket to each other.
● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an cannot detect the attached trailer or if the
towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au- ● Make sure any work on bent pins is car-
anti-theft alarm and towing bracket.
to repair shop other than SEAT, you must ried out by a specialised workshop.
● If the trailer is electrically connected to the
manually select the Normal profile before
towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-
you start driving with a trailer attached. To re- CAUTION
et.
connect the Eco profile once the trailer has
● If the electrical systems of the vehicle and Do not leave the trailer connected to the
been unhitched, switch the ignition off and
vehicle when parked; place it on its support
trailer are in perfect condition and have no back on once. wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or
faults or damage.
falls due, for example, to a variation of the
● If the vehicle is locked with the key and the WARNING load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will
anti-theft alarm is activated. If the cables are improperly or incorrectly be placed on the towing bracket and the
connected, it may lead to an excessive trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- can be damaged.
amount of current supplied to the trailer,
gered if the electrical connection with the
which can cause abnormalities in the entire
trailer is cut off. vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- Note
dents and serious injuries.
● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-
tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in
252
Towing bracket device
the anti-theft alarm system, have them in- tical load technically permissible on the Tyre pressure
spected by a specialised workshop. coupling device ››› page 248. An insufficient Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-
vertical load has a negative influence on the cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-
● If the trailer accessories consume energy
behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer. ommendations.
through the power socket to the trailer and
the engine is turned off, the battery will dis- The vertical load increases the weight on the When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the
charge. rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- towing vehicle with the maximum allowable
● If the vehicle battery is running low, the pacity. pressure ››› page 283.
electrical connection with the trailer will be
automatically cut. Gross combination weight of the towing WARNING
vehicle and trailer
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the
The gross combination weight is the actual maximum load technically permissible on
Trailer loading weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual the coupling point, the maximum author-
weight of the loaded trailer. ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-
Technically permissible maximum trailer tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
In some countries trailers are classified into
weight and vertical load on the coupling are exceeded, accidents and serious inju-
distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-
device ries may occur.
taining information from a specialised work-
The technically permissible maximum trailer shop regarding which type of trailer is most ● Never exceed the values indicated!
weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow suitable for your vehicle. ● The actual weight on the front and rear
››› . The vertical load on the coupling is ex- axles must never exceed the maximum per-
erted vertically from above on the hook of the Trailer loading missible axle weight. The weight on the
towing bracket. front and rear axles must never exceed the
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer maximum permissible weight.
The information on the maximum trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the
weight and vertical load on the coupling de- load must be as close as possible to the max-
vice contained in the type plate of the towing imum vertical load technically permissible on WARNING
bracket are experimental values only. The the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis- A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-
correct figures for your specific model, which tributed between the back and front of the ity and security of the towing vehicle and
may be lower than these figures, are given in trailer: trailer, which could lead to accidents and
the vehicle documentation. The information in serious injuries.
the vehicle documentation takes precedence ● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
● Always load the trailer correctly.
at all times. objects are as near to the axle as possible or
● Always secure the load properly using
above it.
To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom- belts or straps that are suitable and in
mends making the most of the maximum ver- ● Secure the trailer load properly. good condition.
253
Driving
Driving with a trailer ● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer WARNING
is loaded, then the load distribution is incor-
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may
Adjusting the headlights rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and
lead to loss of control of the vehicle and
with extra caution.
The front part of the vehicle may be raised serious injury.
when the trailer is connected and the light ● Driving with a trailer and transporting
may dazzle the rest of the traffic. Hill starts with a trailer
heavy or large objects will change the ve-
Depending on the slope of the hill and the hicle handling and braking distances.
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
combination weight of the towing vehicle and
headlight range adjuster ››› page 119 1). ● Always drive cautiously and carefully.
trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-
Brake earlier than usual.
wards slightly when you first start up.
Specific features of driving with a trailer ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake
For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following: times to suit visibility, weather, road and
gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- traffic conditions. Slow down, especially
● Press and hold the brake pedal.
when driving down hills or slopes.
vent the jerking that can be caused by the
● If the vehicle is equipped with a manual ● Accelerate with particular care and cau-
locking of trailer wheels.
gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-
● Due to the gross combination weight of the
down. vres.
towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-
● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se- ● Take great care when overtaking. Reduce
tance increases.
lector lever to position D/S ››› page 198. speed immediately if you notice that the
● When going down a slope, go into a lower trailer is swaying, however slightly.
● Apply the handbrake.
gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-
● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad- ● Release the brake pedal.
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
vantage of the braking power provided by the ● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of
● Take into account the speed limit for vehi-
engine. Otherwise, the braking system could a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch
cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than
overheat and even fail. pedal.
for vehicles without a trailer.
● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com- ● Do not release the hand brake until the en-
bination weight of the towing vehicle and gine has sufficient power to start driving
trailer, change the centre of gravity and the
properties of the vehicle.
xenon headlights.
254
Towing bracket device
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle WARNING repeated automatic braking may occur in
and trailer combination The enhanced safety provided by the elec-
extreme driving conditions.
tric stability control of the vehicle and trail-
The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer er should not lead you to take any risks that
combination is an additional function of the could compromise your safety.
electronic stability control (ESC). ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
Towing bracket device
If the system detects that the trailer is weav- times to suit visibility, weather, road and
ing, it intervenes to reduce the swaying of the traffic conditions. Description
trailer. ● Accelerate with caution when the road is
slippery.
Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa- ● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-
tion requirements erating.
● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-
ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a WARNING
compatible towing bracket.
The electric stability control for the vehicle
● The ESC and ASR are active. The control and trailer may not correctly detect all
lamp or is not lit up on the instrument driving conditions.
cluster. ● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-
● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi- sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-
cle through the trailer power socket. so switched off.
● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h ● The stability system does not always de-
(approx. 37 mph). tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise
these correctly.
● The maximum vertical load technically per-
● When driving on surfaces with poor grip,
missible is not being exceeded on the cou-
pling device. the trailer can even interfere with the sta-
bility system.
● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can Fig. 171 The towing device supports trailers /
● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped tip over without having previously weaved. tow hook / key
with a mechanical overrun brake. ● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-
tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g. Depending on the country or version, the re-
installation of a bicycle rack with lights), movable hook of the towing device is under »
255
Driving
the cover of the load area of the luggage WARNING Placing in the standby position
compartment.
● Before each journey with the tow hook fit-
The tow hook is fitted and removed by hand ted, make sure that it is correctly adjusted
and is supplied with a key. and attached in its housing.
● If the tow hook is not properly fitted and
1 13-pin connector
attached, do not use it.
2 Safety lug
● Do not use the towing bracket device for
3 Hook housing towing if it is damaged or has missing parts.
4 Hook housing cap ● Do not modify or adapt the towing device
5 Protective cap of the ball head connection.
● Never unhook the tow hook while the
6 Removable tow hook
trailer is hitched.
7 Locking lever
8 Lock cover CAUTION
9 Release bolt ● Handle the tow hook with care in order to
10 Lock avoid damaging the bumper paintwork.
11 Locking balls ● The top part of the hook housing is
12 Key greased ››› Fig. 171 3 . When using the de-
vice, make sure that it has not been re-
moved.
Operation and conservation
Fig. 172 Tow hook reserve position
Put the cover on the housing cavity so that
Note
dirt cannot get in.
● Contact a specialised workshop if you
Before hooking up a trailer, always check the lose your key.
ball head and apply suitable grease if neces-
● Towing the vehicle with the tow hook
sary.
››› page 51.
Use the protective cap to store the tow hook.
Clean the housing cavity surfaces and treat
them with an appropriate conservation prod-
uct.
256
Towing bracket device
CAUTION
The key cannot be removed or turned in the
standby position.
Fig. 173 Reserve position: position verification Fitting the tow hook
Before assembling it, place the tow hook in
the standby position with the following two
steps.
257
Driving
Lever ››› Fig. 174 A automatically turns in CAUTION ● The red and green part of the unlocking
the direction of arrow 2 upwards, and the re- bolt B is completely visible ››› Fig. 176.
● After removing the key, place the cover
lease bolt B moves outwards (its red and ● The key has been removed.
over the lever's lock. If the lock becomes
green parts are visible) ››› .
soiled it will be impossible to insert the key. ● Cover C is over the lock ››› Fig. 176.
If lever A does not turn or the release bolt B ● Keep the device's housing cavity clean.
does not come out, the tow hook should be Dirtiness can prevent the tow hook from WARNING
removed by turning the lever as far as possi- being safety secured! ● Keep your hands away from the lever
ble downwards from the housing cavity, and ● If the device is removed, always place when releasing the tow hook to avoid trap-
the tow hook’s support surfaces and the cavi- the cap in the hook's housing. ping your fingers ››› Fig. 176 A .
ty should then be cleaned.
● The towing device should only be used if
the tow hook has been properly locked in
Step 2.
Safety check place!
● Turn the key to the right just half a turn, until
the hole in the key faces downwards
››› Fig. 175 1 .
● Remove the key 2 .
● Place the cover B on the lock 3
››› Fig. 175 ››› .
● Check that the tow hook is correctly fixed in
place ››› page 258, Safety check.
WARNING
● Keep your hands away from the lever
Fig. 176 Tow hook fixed correctly
when fitting the tow hook to avoid trapping
your fingers ››› Fig. 174 A .
Make sure that the tow hook is correctly at-
● Do not try to force the lever up to turn the tached before each use.
key. The detachable ball would not be se-
cured properly! Tow hook fixed correctly:
● The tow hook will not fall out of the housing
cavity after a strong “impact”.
● Lever A is facing upwards ››› Fig. 176.
258
Towing bracket device
CAUTION
Fig. 178 Removing the tow hook ● If the lever is not pressed down as far as it
will go, after removing the tow hook it will
● Remove cover A from lock 1 ››› Fig. 177. continue upwards and will not lock into its
standby position. The tow hook must re-
● Insert key B in the lock 2 ››› Fig. 177.
main in this position before being fitted
● Turn the key to the left 3 just half turn, until
again.
the hole in the key is facing upwards
● Store the device in the reserve position
››› Fig. 177. with the key inserted and with the same
● Hold the tow hook from below. side facing upwards. Risk of damaging the
● Press the release bolt A in the direction of key!
arrow 1 , and at the same time press lever B ● When operating the lever, do not apply
as far as it will go in the direction of arrow 2 too much pressure (for example, do not
Fig. 177 Removing the tow hook ››› Fig. 178. stand on it)!
259
Driving
Connecting the trailer ● After hooking up the trailer and connect- WARNING
ing the socket, check that all the trailer's
The incorrect use of the towing device with
rear lights are working properly.
a bicycle carrier mounted on the tow hook
can cause accidents and injury.
Note ● Never exceed the maximum weight or the
● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting, limits indicated above.
check the fuses on the instrument panel ● The bicycle rack may not be mounted to
››› page 55. the neck of the hook below the ball be-
● The contact between the retainer cable cause, due to the shape of the neck and
and the safety lug may give cause wear in depending on the rack model, the rack
the lug. This wear does not stop it from op- could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-
erating properly and is not a fault. It is ex- cle.
Fig. 179 Turning the 13-pin connector
cluded from the warranty. ● Always read and take the manufacturer
● When hitching and unhitching the trailer, assembly instructions into account.
● Grip the connector in area A and remove it
in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 179. the vehicle's handbrake should be applied.
260
Towing bracket device
Retrofitting a towing bracket ample, it may very well be necessary to ad- ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-
just the cooling system or mount thermal pro- nect the trailer.
tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a
Description SEAT dealership for this.
● The towing bracket should be retrofitted
only at a specialised workshop.
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance
specifications should always be kept in mind. WARNING
The distance between the centre of the ball If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-
head and the road ››› Fig. 180 C must never suitable, the trailer may separate from the
be less than that indicated. This also applies vehicle while driving. This could cause seri-
when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the ous accidents and fatal injuries.
technically permissible maximum vertical
load on the coupling device. Note
Distance specifications ››› Fig. 180: ● According to regulation EU2021_535 it is
A Attachment points (lower part of the vehi- not permitted to install a towing device that
cannot be removed or retracted.
cle)
● Only use towing brackets that have been
B 65 mm (minimum)
approved by SEAT for the model in ques-
C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) tion.
D 1,025 mm ● In some versions, the fitting of a conven-
E 322 mm tional towing hook solution is not recom-
mended. Please consult your Technical
F 448 mm Service.
G 771.5 mm
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connected, this may lead to malfunctions
Fig. 180 Limits and attachment points for ret- in the entire vehicle electronic system, as
rofitting a towing bracket. well as to accidents and serious injuries.
● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
SEAT recommends that towing brackets be tem to the electrical connections of the tail
retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex- lights or any other unsuitable power sour-
261
Practical tips
● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-
rious burns and other injuries.
retainer zone.
● When refuelling, turn off the engine and
● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
turn off the ignition for safety reasons.
262
Checking and refilling levels
263
Practical tips
an explosion of the natural gas tanks and sor (fast refuel) at natural gas service sta- 1 Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-
cause severe injuries! . tions. nol). The number indicates the percent-
age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,
for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.
WARNING
2 Diesel according to the EN590 standard.
If the vehicle underbody touches the Fuel types The number indicates the maximum per-
ground or in the event of a rear collision,
centage of Biodiesel in the fuel. “B7”
there could be damage to the natural gas
tanks. If damaged, natural gas tanks are
Identification of fuels1) means a maximum of 7% Biodiesel.
full of fuel and can explode, causing seri- 3 Synthetic diesel according to the
ous or fatal injuries. EN15940 standard.
● Even if you don't notice the smell of gas, 4 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed
take the vehicle to a specialised workshop Natural Gas.
immediately and have the natural gas sys-
tem checked. Do not refuel natural gas
again until the natural gas system has been
inspected.
Type of petrol
3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines
1) Depending on country
2)Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
264
Checking and refilling levels
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or CAUTION ● In countries in which there is no sulphur-
normal 91 octane petrol at least free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-
● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.
We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- phur content fuel.
E30 - E100 button must not be used. The
tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91 fuel system would be damaged. Exception:
octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 265,
loss) may be used. Ethanol fuel. Ethanol fuel
● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or
3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at other metal additives entails a permanent
least deterioration of the effectiveness of the You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 catalytic converter. gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with the
AKI) at least. ● Only use fuel additives that have been marking “Petrol/ethanol”.
approved by SEAT. The products that con-
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with
tain substances to increase the octane rat-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-
ing or decrease knocking may contain met-
use moderate engine speeds and a light al additives that damage the engine and
ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- catalytic converter. This type of products percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-
ble. must not be used. led in the same way as petrol refuelling.
● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as Also consider that ››› page 264, Type of pet-
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or containing metals. LRP (lead replacement rol
super 95 octane petrol at least petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 metal additives. Risk of engine damage! Note
octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super ● High engine speed and full throttle can SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-
95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power damage the engine when using petrol with sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de-
loss). an octane rating lower than the correct crease impurities that using E100 ethanol
grade for the engine. fuel might have left in the engine.
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light Note
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ● Fuel with an octane rating higher than the
ble. one required by the engine can be used.
266
Checking and refilling levels
When the ignition is switched on, the (Electronic CAUTION Regeneration of the particulate filter
Power Control) lights up and should go off once the Requirements for the regeneration journey:
engine has started. Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause an irregular fuel supply can cause the engine is at operating temperature.
ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to
Note enter the exhaust system, which could
● Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h
While the indicator lamps , or are cause overheating and damage the cata- (31-75 mph). This increases the temperature
on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel lytic converter. and burns the soot in the filter ››› .
consumption may go up and the engine ● Consider the legal speed limits as well as
might lose power. the recommended gears.
● End the regeneration journey once the con-
trol warning lamp has gone out. »
267
Practical tips
268
Checking and refilling levels
there is an additional, potentially fatal, or other fluids in the area where it was
safety risk from the rotating parts, such as parked, have your vehicle inspected at the
the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., workshop.
and from the high-voltage ignition system. ● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-
You should also observe the following: vironment. For this reason you should make
– Never touch the electrical wiring of the regular checks on the ground underneath
ignition system. your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a
and long hair do not get trapped in ro- specialised workshop.
tating engine parts. Danger of death.
Before starting any work remove jewel- Fig. 185 Lever under the bonnet.
lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear Opening and closing the bonnet
tight-fitting clothes. Opening the bonnet
– Never accelerate with a gear engaged
The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-
without taking the necessary precau-
cle.
tions. The vehicle could move, even if
the handbrake is applied. Danger of Before opening the bonnet, make sure that
death. the windscreen wiper arms are in place
● Observe the following additional warn- against the windscreen.
ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-
● Open the door and pull the lever under the
trical system is necessary:
dashboard ››› Fig. 184 1 .
– Always disconnect the battery from the
on-board network. ● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on
the lever located under the bonnet, in the
– Do not smoke. Fig. 184 Release lever in the driver's footwell
area. centre ››› Fig. 185 2 . The arrester hooks are
– Never work near naked flames.
released.
– Always keep an approved fire extin-
● The bonnet can be opened. Release the
guisher immediately available.
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-
signed for this in the bonnet.
For the sake of the environment
● Inspect the ground underneath your vehi- Closing the bonnet
cle regularly so that any leaks are detec- ● Slightly lift the bonnet. »
ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil
269
Practical tips
● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its WARNING the windscreen wipers are in place against
support. the windscreen.
Make sure that the bonnet is properly
● At a height of approximately 20 cm let it fall
closed. If it opens when driving, it can
so it locks. cause an accident.
Checking levels
From time to time, the levels of the different 1 Coolant expansion tank ››› page 274 5 Battery ››› page 277
fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never 2 Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 272 6 Windscreen washer reservoir
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious ››› page 277
3 Engine oil filler cap ››› page 273
damage to the engine may be caused.
4 Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 276
270
Checking and refilling levels
Note Key to the ››› Fig. 187: – Petrol and CNG engines: VW 504 00,
A Information about the engine oil stand- ACEA C3 or API SN standard.
The layout of parts may vary depending on
the engine. ard.
SEAT recommends changing the oil at a spe-
B Information about engine oil viscosity. cialised workshop. SEAT recommends an Of-
ficial SEAT Service.
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
Engine oil oil that can be used all year round. SEAT recommends the use of engine oils ap-
proved according to the appropriate VW
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
standard. Use of engine oils that do not meet
General notes tial for the correct operation of the engine
these quality requirements can cause engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
damage.
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards. SEAT recommends the use of Original SEAT
Spare Part engine oils.
For vehicles with an engine oil label
Engine oil additives
If the engine oil has to be topped up, use one
of the oils shown on the label ››› Fig. 187. The No type of additive should be mixed with the
label with the prescribed standard is located engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
at the front of the engine compartment additives is not covered by the warranty.
››› Fig. 188 1 . If you use the recommended
engine oil, you can top up the oil as often as CAUTION
Fig. 187 In the engine compartment: engine oil necessary. Take the following into account if you have
label
refilled with an engine oil different to those
For vehicles without an engine oil label specified in the aforementioned standards,
or by your SEAT technical service centre:
Contact a specialised workshop or SEAT offi-
cial service for information about the corre- ● There is no way of completely avoiding
sponding standard. the danger of causing damage to the en-
gine and particulate filter.
If the engine oil level is too low ● You can continue driving with the vehicle
if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine
If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon
ble, in the event of an emergency you can
as possible and request an oil change. Oth-
Fig. 188 In the engine compartment: area change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L erwise, there is a danger of engine dam-
where the engine oil label is located of the next oil until the next oil change: age. »
271
Practical tips
● If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of Warning lamp Checking the engine oil level
engine oil, drive with the engine at low load
levels and within the medium RPM range as It lights up red
a maximum. Do not drive at more than 80
km/h and do not travel more than 300 km Do not carry on driving!
(approximately). Go to a specialised work- Engine oil pressure too low.
shop as soon as possible and request an oil Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.
change. Otherwise, there is a danger of en- If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom-
gine damage. panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en-
● You are responsible for the risk of possi- gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more
ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust oil ››› page 273.
system). If in doubt, do not start the engine
If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level
and request assistance from the technical is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at Fig. 189 Engine oil dipstick.
service centre. idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.
● Do not start the engine if you have top- The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of
ped up with a fluid other than engine oil. It lights up yellow the oil.
Request assistance from the technical
service centre. Danger of engine damage! Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.
Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to Checking oil level
do so ››› page 273. – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Note
– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the
Before a long trip, we recommend finding It flashes yellow
an engine oil that conforms to the corre-
operating temperature is reached and then
sponding VW specifications and recom- Fault in the oil level sensor. stop.
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-
– Wait for about two minutes.
correct engine oil will always be available til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time
you refuel. – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
for a top-up if needed.
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
WARNING in as far as it will go.
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- – Then pull it out once more and check the oil
trol and warning lamps on page 87. level ››› Fig. 189. Top up with engine oil if
necessary.
● Zone A : do not add oil. Topping up the engine oil The position of the oil filler opening is shown
● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level in the corresponding engine compartment il-
in that zone. lustration ››› page 270.
● Zone C : add oil until zone B . Engine oil specification ››› page 271.
273
Practical tips
Engine oil change For the sake of the environment increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
● We recommend that you change the en-
We recommend that you have the engine oil worsen cooling.
gine oil and the filter at a technical service
changed by a Technical Service.
centre. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
● Never pour oil down drains or into the of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
WARNING
ground. additive G12evo for optimal protection
Only change the engine oil yourself if you against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13
● Use a suitable container when draining
have the specialist knowledge required! (TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),
the used oil. It must be large enough to hold
● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- all the engine oil.
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
serve the warnings ››› page 268. (green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-
● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil tection again corrosion and should be avoi-
may cause burn injuries. ded.
● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, Cooling system
WARNING
such as acid burns, caused by splashes of
oil. Coolant specifications If there is not enough anti-freeze in the
● When removing the oil drain plug with coolant system, the engine may fail lead-
your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to The engine cooling system is supplied from ing to serious damage.
help prevent oil from running down your the factory with a specially treated mixture of ● Ensure that the percentage of additive is
arm. water and at least 40 % of the additive correct for the lowest expected ambient
● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture temperature in the zone in which the vehi-
contact with engine oil. gives the necessary frost protection down to cle is to be used.
-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy ● When the outside temperature is very
● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
parts of the engine cooling system against low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-
stored in a safe place out of the reach of
children. corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con- cle would be immobilised.
siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-
ant. CAUTION
CAUTION
To protect the cooling system, the percent- The original additives should never be
No additives should be used with engine oil.
age of additive must always be at least 40 %, mixed with coolants which are not ap-
This could result in engine damage. Any
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- proved by SEAT.
damage caused by the use of such addi-
tection is not required. ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not
tives would not be covered by the factory
warranty. If for weather reasons further protection is purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-
necessary, the proportion of additive may be cates that the G12evo additive has been
274
Checking and refilling levels
mixed with an inadequate coolant. The – Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with
coolant must be changed as soon as possi- a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left
ble if this is the case! ››› .
– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-
For the sake of the environment ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you
could damage the engine. If there is no
Coolants and additives can contaminate
the environment. If any fluids are spilled,
coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-
they should be collected and correctly dis- tinue driving. You should obtain professional
posed of, with respect to the environment. assistance ››› .
– If there is still some coolant in the expansion
Fig. 192 Engine compartment: coolant expan-
sion tank cap. tank, top up to the upper mark.
Refilling coolant – Top up with coolant until the level becomes
The coolant tank is located in the engine stable.
compartment ››› page 270.
– Screw the cap back on correctly.
Top up coolant when the level is below the
(minimum) mark. If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-
cialised workshop to have the cooling system
Checking coolant level examined.
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
WARNING
– Switch the ignition off.
● The cooling system is under pressure. Do
– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
Fig. 191 In the engine compartment: marking burns!
on coolant expansion tank. coolant level should be between the marks
››› Fig. 191. When the engine is hot, it may ● Store the antifreeze in its original con-
be slightly above the upper mark. tainer and keep it out of reach of children.
● If working inside the engine compart-
Topping up coolant ment, remember that, even when the igni-
– Wait for the engine to cool down. tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury. »
275
Practical tips
CAUTION However, if the brake fluid level goes down CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards
noticeably in a short time, or drops below the FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
If you run out of coolant in the expansion
mark, there may be a leak in the brake ● The replacement brake fluid must be
tank, park the car in a safe place and do
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning
not continue driving. Obtain technical as- new.
light on the instrument panel display monitors
sistance. ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
the brake fluid level ››› page 86.
original container in a safe place out of
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
Changing brake fluid
Brake fluid We recommend that you have the brake fluid
CAUTION
changed by a Technical Service.
Brake fluid should not come into contact
Check and refill the brake fluid
WARNING with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.
276
Checking and refilling levels
Windscreen washer reservoir Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- CAUTION
screen and headlights. We recommend that
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
you always add a product to the windscreen
Checking the level of the window washer fluid.
similar additives with the windscreen wash-
er water. A greasy layer may be formed on
washer tank and refilling it
the windscreen which will impair visibility.
Recommended windscreen wipers
● Use clean water with a window cleaner
● For the hottest seasons we recommend recommended by SEAT.
summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-
● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:
the water in the reservoir.
1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-
ter).
CAUTION
● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.
Approximate proportion of the winter mixture, ● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-
up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2 ded by SEAT with other products. This
parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of could lead to flocculation and may block
mixture in the washer fluid tank. the windscreen washer jets.
Fig. 194 In the engine compartment: blue cap
● When topping up service fluids, make ab-
of the windscreen washer tank. The capacity of the window washer tank can solutely certain that you fill the fluids into
be found in ››› page 308. the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-
The window washer tank is in the engine
ids could cause serious malfunctions and
compartment ››› page 270.
CAUTION engine damage!
Check the water level in the windscreen If the water from the windscreen washer ● Lack of window washer fluid causes the
washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may view through the windscreen to be ob-
quired. freeze on the windscreen and rear window, scured.
The window washer tank contains liquid de- reducing forward and rear visibility.
tergent for the windscreen and rear window. ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
contains enough anti-freeze.
● Open the bonnet ››› page 268.
● In cold conditions, you should not use the
12-volt battery
● The window washer tank is marked with the windscreen wiper system unless you have
symbol on the cap. warmed the windscreen with the ventila- General information
● Check there is enough windscreen water in tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on
the windscreen and reduce visibility. The battery is located in the engine compart-
the reservoir.
ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is »
277
Practical tips
checked as part of the Inspection Service. are lost. These functions will require resetting ● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking
Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean after the battery is reconnected. are prohibited. When handling cables and
and have the correct tightening torque, espe- electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks
When disconnecting the battery from the ve-
cially in summer and winter. and electrostatic charge. Never short the
hicle on-board network, disconnect first the
battery terminals. High-energy sparks can
All work on batteries requires specialist negative cable and then the positive cable.
cause injury.
knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm before you ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
Service or a workshop specialising in batter-
disconnect the battery. Otherwise the alarm leased when the battery is under charge.
ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!
will be triggered. The batteries should be charged in a well-
The battery must not be opened. Never try ventilated room only.
to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- Winter conditions ● Keep children away from acid and bat-
erwise explosive gas is released from the bat- teries.
During the winter, the starting power may be
tery that could cause an explosion.
reduced, and if necessary, the battery should ● Before working on the electrical system,
Battery warning indications be charged ››› you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical devices. The negative ca-
Wear eye protection. WARNING ble on the battery must be disconnected.
When a light bulb is changed, you need on-
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- Always be aware of the danger of injury
ly switch off the light.
tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any and chemical burns as well as the risk of
splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water. accident or fire when working on the bat- ● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-
tery and the electrical system: locking the vehicle before you disconnect
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are
● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,
the battery! The alarm will otherwise be
prohibited.
triggered.
skin and clothing from acid and particles
The battery should only be charged in a well- containing lead. ● When disconnecting the battery from the
ventilated zone. Risk of explosion! vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
the negative cable and then the positive
Keep children away from acid and batteries! protective gloves and eye protection. Do
cable.
not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid
Always follow the instruction manual. through the vents. ● Switch off all electrical devices before
reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first
● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on
Disconnecting the battery the positive cable and then the negative
the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-
cable. Never reverse the polarity of the
The battery should only be disconnected in tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If
connections. This could cause an electrical
exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a
fire.
connected, some of the vehicle's functions doctor immediately.
278
Checking and refilling levels
● Never charge a frozen battery, or one If the control lamp lights up while driving, ● Check the colour display in the "magic eye"
which has thawed. This could result in ex- the alternator is no longer charging the bat- on the top of the battery.
plosions and chemical burns. Always re- tery. You should immediately drive to the ● If there are air bubbles in the window, tap
place a battery which has frozen. A flat nearest specialised workshop. the window gently until they disperse.
battery can also freeze at temperatures
You should avoid using electrical equipment
close to 0°C (+32°F). The position of the battery is shown in the
that is not absolutely necessary because this
● Ensure that the vent hose is always con- corresponding engine compartment diagram
will drain the battery.
nected to the battery. ››› page 270.
● Never use a defective battery. This could The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
cause an explosion. Replace a damaged of the battery changes colour, depending on
Checking the battery electrolyte
battery immediately. the charge state and electrolyte level of the
level
battery.
CAUTION
There are two different colours:
● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-
Yellow or colourless: The battery's electrolyte
light over a long period of time, as the in-
level is too low. Go to a specialised work-
tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the
shop to have the battery checked and
battery housing.
replaced if necessary.
● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-
ditions for a long period, protect the bat- Black: The battery’s electrolyte level is cor-
tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be rect.
damaged.
Fig. 195 Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt Charging or changing the battery
Warning lamp battery (schematic representation).
If you often drive short distances or if the ve-
The electrolyte level should be checked reg- hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery
It lights up red ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- should be checked by a specialised work-
Alternator fault. tries and in older batteries. shop between the scheduled services.
● Open the bonnet and then lift the cover If the battery has discharged and you have
The control lamp lights up when the ignition is problems starting the vehicle, the battery
switched on. It should go out when the engine that protects the front part of the battery
››› in Working in the engine compart- might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-
has started running.
ment on page 268. ommend you have the vehicle battery »
279
Practical tips
280
Wheels
Low profile tyres Foreign objects inserted in the tyre P max. 150 km/h (93 mph)
Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger ● Do not remove foreign bodies if they have Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. penetrated through the tyre wall! R max. 170 km/h (106 mph)
Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile. ● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility S max. 180 km/h (112 mph)
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- system, where necessary seal the damaged
T max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
ly than standard tyres, for instance due to tyre as shown in section ››› page 40. Use a
strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and specialised workshop for repair or replace- U max. 200 km/h (124 mph)
kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT H max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
››› page 283. dealership for this.
V max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread
Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for
with special care when driving on roads in wraps around the foreign body and provision-
tyres with a maximum authorised speed
poor condition. ally seals the tyre.
above 240 km/h (149 mph).
Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.
Tyres with directional tread pattern WARNING
If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- ● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-
pact or have been damaged, have a special-
rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly
ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-
ways note the direction of rotation indicated carefully to avoid possible accidents.
essary to change the tyre.
when mounting the wheel. This makes sure
● Never drive with damaged tyres. This
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- that optimal use is made of tyre properties in
may cause an accident.
ly than standard tyres. terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise
● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the
and wear.
vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop
Concealed damage
the vehicle immediately and check the
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily Subsequent fitting of accessories
tyres.
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or ● Never use old tyres or those with an un-
car pulling to one side, this may indicate wheel trims, we recommend that you consult known history of use.
that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice
speed immediately if there is any reason to regarding current techniques.
suspect that damage may have occurred. In-
spect the tyres for damage. If no external Speed symbols New wheels and tyres
damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully
The speed rating indicates the maximum It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced
to the nearest specialised workshop and
have the car inspected.
speed permitted for the tyres. by a specialised workshop. There they have »
281
Practical tips
the required knowledge, the special tools and Manufacturing date hibited use can cause accidents or can
the corresponding spare parts. The manufacturing date is also indicated on damage your vehicle.
● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the ● If decorative hubcaps are subsequently
have installed new tyres, drive the first 500 wheel): fitted, make sure that they allow enough air
km carefully and at a moderate speed. in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-
DOT ... 2218 ...
dent!
● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of
it means, for example, that the tyre was man-
the same type, size (rolling circumference) ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.
and, if possible, tread pattern. For the sake of the environment
● When changing tyres, do not change just WARNING Old tyres must be disposed of according to
one; change at least two on the same axle. the laws in the country concerned.
● Use only combinations of tyres and rims,
● If you want to equip your vehicle with a as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by
combination tyres and rims that are different SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam- Note
to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe- aged, causing an accident. ● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-
cialised workshop before purchasing them ● For technical reasons it is not possible to ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of
››› use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases different sizes to those originally fitted by
not even wheels from the same vehicle SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for model should be used. the combinations allowed between the
your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
● Always ensure that the tyres you have
mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity ● Never mount used tyres if you are not
chosen have adequate clearance. When
or COC document1)). The vehicle documen- selecting replacement tyres, do not rely sure of their “previous history”.
tation varies depending on the country of res- entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on
idence. the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-
If the type of spare wheel is different form the fer significantly depending on the manu-
normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter facturer. Lack of clearance can damage
the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-
tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare
danger road safety. Risk of accident!
wheel should only be used temporarily in the
event of a puncture, and the vehicle should ● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in
be driven with care. Refit the normal road an emergency, and drive with due care.
wheel as soon as possible. ● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-
ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-
Tyre life ● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre
● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from pressure label ››› Fig. 196.
time to time.
Driving style
Tyre pressure Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre
sticker on the rear of the front left door frame wear.
››› Fig. 196.
Wheel balance
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-
duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- However, certain circumstances may lead to
rect inflation pressures are very important, imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
especially at high speeds. brations in the steering wheel.
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,
be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- as they otherwise cause excessive wear on
ing comfort (tyre pressure ››› Fig. 196). steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
consumption may increase slightly. or if a tyre is repaired.
Fig. 196 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- Incorrect wheel alignment
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the
ing habits will increase the useful life of your Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
vehicle is going to carry the maximum load,
tyres. cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
the tyre pressure should be increased to the
vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,
maximum value indicated on the sticker
should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-
and also prior to any long trip. ››› Fig. 196.
ficial Service.
● The tyre pressure should only be checked Do not forget the spare wheel when checking
when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in- WARNING
pressure of warm tyres. flated to the highest pressure required for the
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and
road wheels.
● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-
ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 196. In the case of a minimised temporary spare ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-
● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18), inflate to a out. »
save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 287.
283
Practical tips
● The driver is responsible for ensuring that Tread wear indicators or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla- the position of the wear indicators.
ted to the right pressure. The recommen- The minimum permitted profile depth1) have
ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label been reached when the tyres have worn
››› Fig. 196. down to the wear indicators. Replace the
● Check tyre pressures regularly and en- tyres with new ones ››› .
sure they are maintained at the pressures
indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low Changing wheels around
could cause overheating, resulting in tread
detachment or even burst tyres. To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure
the wheels should be changed round from
should be that indicated on the label
time to time according to the system
››› Fig. 196. ››› Fig. 198. The useful life of all the tyres will
Fig. 197 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.
then be about the same time.
● Regularly check the cold inflation pres-
sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the
WARNING
tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they
are cold. The tyres must be replaced at the latest
● Regularly check your tyres for damage when the tread is worn down to the tread
and wear. wear indicators. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
● Never exceed the maximum permitted
● Particularly in difficult driving conditions
speed or loads specified for the type of
tyre fitted on your vehicle. such as wet or icy roads. It is important that
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and
be approximately the same on the tyres of
For the sake of the environment both the front and the rear axles.
Fig. 198 Interchanging tyres.
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- ● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-
sumption. Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be cient tread depth is particularly evident in
found on the base of the original tyre treads, vehicle handling, when there is a risk of
“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water
ordered at regular intervals and running
across the tread ››› Fig. 197. The letters "TWI"
driving in.
284
Wheels
and when driving through corners, and tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
braking is also adversely affected. and threads can be damaged. and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
equipped with wide section tyres or with
● The speed has to be adapted according-
high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on
ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control CAUTION
over the vehicle.
the sidewall).
See ››› page 47to find out the recommen-
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for
steel and alloy rims.
proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
Wheel nuts tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents
(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)).
The wheel nuts are matched to the rims. The vehicle documentation varies depending
When installing different wheels (for instance
Winter tyres on the country of residence.
alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
– Winter tyres must be fitted on all four
important to use the correct wheel nuts with ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
wheels.
the right length and correctly shaped bolt of 4 mm.
heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- – Only use winter tyres that are approved for
curely and that the brake system functions your vehicle. The performance of winter tyres is also se-
correctly. verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is
– Please note that the maximum permissible still much deeper than 4 mm.
The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily. speed for winter tyres may be lower than
for summer tyres. A code letter indicating the speed limit is
A special adapter is required to remove the stamped on all winter tyres ››› page 281.
anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 44. – Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
fective when the tread is worn down. Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
WARNING must have an appropriate sticker attached
– After fitting the wheels you must always so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-
Wheel nuts should never be greased or check the tyre pressures. When doing so, ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-
oiled. take into account the correct tyre pressures ice and specialised workshop. Please note
● Use only wheel nuts which belong to the listed on the rear of the front left door frame the regulations to this effect in your country.
wheel. ››› page 283.
● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts Using winter tyres with V-rating
In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-
is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-
siderably improve vehicle handling. The de- Please note that the generally applicable
hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the
sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com- 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres »
with the letter V is subject to technical re- Snow chains Tyres Wheel rim Chains
strictions; the maximum permissible speed
for your vehicle may be significantly lower. Snow chains should only be used on the 185/70 R14 5Jx14 ET38
The maximum speed limit for these tyres de- front wheels.
185/65 R15 5.5Jx15 ET40 Max. link 13.5
pends directly on the maximum axle weights
for your car and on the listed weight rating of ● Check that they are correctly seated after 185/60 R16 6Jx16 ET45 mm
the tyres being used. driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac- 195/55 R16 6Jx16 ET45
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to turer's fitting instructions. 185/60 R16 6.5Jx16 ET47
check the maximum speed which is permissi-
● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on 195/55 R16 6.5Jx16 ET47
the basis of this information. ● If there is a danger of being trapped de- Max. link 9 mm
spite having mounted the chains, it is best to 215/45 R17 7Jx17 ET51
WARNING disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC 215/40 R18 7Jx18 ET51
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted
››› page 240, Connecting and disconnect-
ing the ESC and ASR. Other dimensions do not allow chains
for the winter tyres fitted on your car can
cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-
Snow chains will improve braking ability as Remove any central wheel trims and the rim
trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.
well as traction in winter conditions. ring before fitting snow chains.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
For the sake of the environment WARNING
be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
When winter is over, change back to sum- combination. The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted
mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In chains could lead to serious accidents and
temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform- damage.
ance will be improved if summer tyres are ● Always the appropriate snow chains.
used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises
while driving will all be reduced. ● Observe the fitting instructions provided
by the snow chain manufacturer.
● Never exceed the maximum permitted
Note
speeds when driving with snow chains.
All-weather tyres can also be used instead
of winter tyres. Please note that only winter
tyres with the symbol may be fitted in
CAUTION
some countries where winter tyres are ● Remove the snow chains to drive on
mandatory. roads without snow. Otherwise they will
286
Wheels
impair vehicle handling, damage the tyres Tyre pressure monitor indicator Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in-
and wear out very quickly. dicator
● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-
The tyre pressure monitor indicator compares After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
ed if the chains come into direct contact wheel revolutions and, with this information, one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni-
with them. SEAT recommends the use of the tread of each wheel using the ABS sen- toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the
covered snow chains. sors. same, for example, when the front and rear
The tyre pressure monitor indicator warns of wheels are swapped.
any change in the tread diameter of a wheel
● Switch the ignition on.
.
Tyre pressure monitor sys- ● Save the new inflation pressure in the info-
tem Wheel tread change tainment system using the button > Ve-
hicle status > Tyres; OR: > Exteri-
The wheel diameter changes when:
or settings > Tyres ››› page 92 .
Control lamp
● Tyre pressure is changed manually.
When driving, the system self-calibrates the
● Tyre pressure is insufficient. tyre pressure provided by the driver and the
It lights up
● The tyre structure is damaged. wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied
The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the speeds the programmed values are collected
value set by the driver ››› in Tyre pressure moni- ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a
and monitored.
tor indicator on page 287. load.
● The wheels on an axle are subject to a With the wheels under very heavy loads, the
Or: Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). tyre pressure must be increased to the total
recommended tyre pressure before calibra-
Several control and warning lamps light up ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
tion ››› Fig. 196.
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
ed on while the function is verified. They will
● The wheel on one axle is changed. WARNING
switch off after a few seconds.
When the tyres are inflated at different
There may be a delay in the reaction of the
WARNING pressures or at a pressure that is too low
tyre pressure monitoring indicator or it may then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- not indicate anything under certain circum- loss of control of the vehicle and a serious
trol and warning lamps on page 87. stances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or or fatal accident.
unpaved roads, or when driving with snow
● If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-
chains).
mediately and avoid any sudden turning or »
287
Practical tips
braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, Spare wheel Removing the temporary spare wheel
and check the tyre pressure and status. ● Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove
● The tyre monitoring system can only op- Location and use of the temporary the temporary spare wheel ››› page 132.
erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla- ● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise.
spare wheel
ted to the correct pressure when cold.
● Take out the temporary spare wheel.
● If a tyre has not been punctured and it
does not have to be changed immediately,
Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles
drive to the nearest specialised workshop
with BEATS Audio 6 speakers (with sub-
at a moderate speed and have the tyre
checked and inflated to the correct pres-
woofer)
sure. To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-
move the subwoofer.
Note ● Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-
● Driving for the first time with new tyres at gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-
a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it
pand, which could then produce an air out.
pressure warning.
● Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-
● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring Fig. 199 In the luggage compartment: remove
the subwoofer. ment floor: lift and secure the floor luggage
system. Regularly check your tyres to en- compartment as explained in ››› page 132.
sure that the tyre pressure is correct and
The temporary spare wheel is stored under ● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 199 1
that the tyres are not damaged due to
puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. the floor panel in the luggage compartment speaker cable.
Remove objects from the tyres only when and is attached by a thumbnut. ● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-
they have not pierced the tyres. The temporary spare wheel has been de- wise direction ››› Fig. 199 2 .
● The tyre pressure monitoring indicator signed to be used for short periods of time. ● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the
does not function when there is a fault in Have the tyres checked and replaced as spare wheel.
the ESC or ABS ››› page 238. soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or
● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the
● If the battery is disconnected, the yellow at a specialised workshop.
subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with
warning lamp lights up after turning the
The spare wheel must not be switched for a care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”
ignition on. This should turn off after a brief
spare wheel from another vehicle. arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.
journey.
● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-
tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the
288
Wheels
subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in ● If you are driving using the spare wheel,
place. the ACC system could automatically
switch off during the journey. Switch off the
Chains system when starting off.
For technical reasons, snow chains must not
be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the
punctured front wheel with this wheel.
WARNING
● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-
ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-
dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back
of the left front door frame ››› Fig. 196.
● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when the temporary spare wheel is fitted
on the vehicle: risk of accident!
● Never travel more than 200 km using a
temporary spare wheel.
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering: risk of accident!
● Never use more than one temporary
spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-
dent.
● No other type of tyre (normal summer or
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
289
Maintenance
Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried
out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-
In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT
authorised service or specialised workshop alised workshop.
SEAT Maintenance Pro- documents the following information:
CAUTION
gramme ● When each one of the services was carried
out. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of
Service intervals ● Whether a specific repair has been sugges-
lack of availability of spare parts.
ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near
future.
Service work and the Digital Main- Note
● If you have expressed a special request for
tenance Plan Regular services on the vehicle not only
the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will
write the work order. maintain its value, but also its correct oper-
Log of services performed (“Digital Main- ation and road safety. For this reason, con-
tenance Plan”) ● The components or fluids that were
duct the services in accordance with SEAT
changed. guidelines.
The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-
shop records Service receipts in a central ● The date of the next service.
system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until
mentation of the service history, it is possible Set Service or Flexible Service In-
the next inspection. This information is docu-
to reproduce the services performed any
time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service
mented in all checks performed. tervals
receipt after every service carried out con- The type and the volume of the service may
Services are classified as oil change service
taining all the services carried out on the sys- vary from one vehicle to another. A special-
and inspection. The service interval display
tem. ised workshop will be able to provide specific
on the instrument panel display serves as a
information on the jobs for your vehicle.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is reminder of the next service.
replaced with a current one.
WARNING Depending on the features, the engine and
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- the conditions of use of the car, either the
If the services are insufficient or not per-
able in some markets. In this case, your Fixed service or the Flexible service will be
formed and if the service intervals are not
SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- observed, the vehicle may be immobilised applied for an oil change service..
rent documentation of the work. in traffic cause an accident and severe in-
juries.
290
SEAT Maintenance Programme
How to know which type of service needs you have to carry out this service, take into Information about the terms of use
to his vehicle account the individual conditions of use and
● Check the tables below: personal driving style. A major component of The service intervals and groups are usually
the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- based on normal conditions of use.
stead of conventional engine oil.
Oil change servicea) If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-
Bear in mind the information about the speci- verse conditions of use, some of the work
Type of fications of the engine oil according to the
PR No. Service interval must be carried out before the next service
service VW standard ››› page 271. period or even between service intervals.
Every 5000 km or after If you do not want to the flexible service Conditions of use adverse include:
QI1
1 yearb)
you can select the fixed service However,
a fixed service may affect service costs ● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
Every 7500 km or after
QI2
1 yearb) The Service Advisor will gladly advise you. ● Frequent short trips.
Fixed
Every 10000 km or after ● Letting the engine idle for a long period of
QI3 Service interval display
1 yearb) time, as in the case of taxis.
At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- ● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.
Every 15000 km or after
QI4 ted by the service intervals display:
1 yearb) ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending
● on the instrument panel ››› page 82 on equipment).
According to the service in-
QI6 Flexible ● in the infotainment system: menu > Set-
terval display ● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a
tings > Service; OR > Vehicle status > lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).
a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.
Service ››› page 88.
b) ● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.
Whatever happens first.
The service interval display gives information
This applies especially for the following
Inspection Servicea) for service dates that involve an engine oil
parts (depending on equipment):
change or an inspection. When the time for
According to the service interval display the corresponding service comes, additional ● Dust and pollen filter
a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. work required, such as the change of brake
● Air Care allergen filter
fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.
● Air filter
Particular characteristics of the Flexible
Service ● Toothed chain
● Particulate filter
Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil
change service only has to be performed ● Engine oil »
when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when
291
Maintenance
The Service Advisor of your specialised ● Your SEAT authorised service placing complete sets, such as: light engine,
workshop will gladly inform you about the ● Your specialised workshop gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical
need of performing service work between components, etc.
normal service intervals, always considering Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-
These parts are, approved parts, and are the
the conditions of use of your vehicle. opment of components) the sets of services
same as the factory parts, which are also ap-
may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or
proved spare parts.
WARNING specialised workshop is always receiving up-
If the services are insufficient or not per- dates in time.
formed and if the service intervals are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
Original accessories
in traffic and cause accidents and severe
injuries.
Additional service offers We recommend you only use SEAT Original
Accessories and SEAT approved accessories
● Have the services conducted at author-
Approved spare parts for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and
ised SEAT services or specialised work-
suitability of these accessories have been in-
shops.
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- spected specifically for this type of vehicle.
ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and
CAUTION SEAT S.A., with a special emphasis on safety. suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage These parts correspond exactly to the manu-
to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of facturer's requirements in terms of design,
lack of availability of spare parts. accuracy of the measurements and materi- SEAT Service Mobility
als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been
conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this Since the moment you purchase your SEAT
reason, we always recommend the use of vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits
Service sets
Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT S.A. cannot and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.
Sets of services include all the maintenance be held liable for the safety and suitability of
For the first two years after the purchase,
works needed to ensure the safety and the parts from other manufacturers.
your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-
smooth running of the vehicle (depending on ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-
the conditions of use and the features of ditional costs.
the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or Approved spare parts
If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-
operating fluids). Maintenance services are
Approved spare parts, following the manu- od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as
divided into inspection and review services.
facturer's requirements, are an additional you carry out the recommended Inspection
Consult the details of the jobs required for
your vehicle at: service to you, offering the possibility of re-
292
Vehicle maintenance
SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect WARNING High pressure cleaning equipment
condition of new vehicles. Check the pur- ● Cleaning products and other materials When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
chase agreement or complementary addi- used for car care can be damaging to your sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
tional documentation provided by your Tech- health if misused. structions for the equipment. This applies
nical Service to see the conditions and the ● Always keep care products in a safe particularly to the operating pressure and the
terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- place, out of the reach of children. Danger distance between the spraying water. Do not
mation in this regard in your SEAT Official of poisoning! aim the jet directly to the side window gas-
Service. kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sunroof;
the same applies to tyres, rubber hoses,
For the sake of the environment
soundproofing material, sensors or camera
● When purchasing car care products, lenses. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm.
chose products that are compatible with
the environment. Do not remove snow and ice with a high-
● The waste from car-care products should
pressure cleaner. »
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste.
293
Maintenance
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To exterior mirrors should only be folded elec-
in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do tronically!
jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with Risk of damaging the paint job!
60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household
bre cloth. sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
Automatic car washes Risk of damaging the surface!
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water
Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of ● Vehicle parts with matte paint:
wash. water with a leather cloth. – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of
damaging the surface!
Make sure that the windows and the panor-
WARNING – Never select washing programs that in-
amic sunroof are closed and the windscreen
wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition clude the use of wax. This could dam-
structions of the car wash tunnel operator, switched off or according to the specifica- age the appearance of matte paint.
especially if your vehicle has detachable tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts
parts. of accident! with matte paint, as removing them
● When cleaning the underbody or the in- may damage the paint.
Use of car washes without brushes if possible.
side of the wheel arches, protect yourself
from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of For the sake of the environment
Washing by hand cut!
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a The car should only be washed in special
● After cleaning the brakes could act more
wash bays. These places are prepared to
soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice
prevent oily water from getting into the
ing products that do not contain solvents. on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-
public drains.
dent! In this case the brakes should be
Washing vehicles with a matte paint by dried by pressing the brake pedal several
hand times.
295
Maintenance
1 litre of water
296
Vehicle maintenance
Problem Solution Camera lenses ● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-
● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice moved through friction. Risk of damaging the
Care Apply preservative cream regu- or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of paint job!
larly to protect from sunlight.
cracking the lens! ● Remove cosmetic products and sunlight
Use a colour preservative if re-
quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
sive cleaning products or products with alco-
a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Displays/instrument panel
1 litre of water ● The screens, the instrument panel and the
Carbon fibre parts Windows trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of
● Remove snow and ice from windows and scratches!
Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To ● Make sure that the instrument panel is
Dirt Clean like plastic parts avoid scratches, the scraper should only be switched off and cooled down before clean-
pushed in one direction and not moved to ing.
and fro. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the
● Never remove snow or ice from windows instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-
Take special care with...
and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. age!
Risk of cracks on the windows!
Headlights/tail lights
● To prevent damage to the heating of the Control panels
● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with
rear window, do not put stickers over the ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-
a dry cloth or sponge.
heating elements. trol panels. Risk of damage!
● Do not use cleaning products that contain
alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Seat belts
● Do not use cleaning products or chrome ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.
Wheels
based cleaning agents. ● Seat belts and their components must nev-
● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive
er be cleaned with chemical products, nor
products. Paint should they be allowed to come into contact
● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-
rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!
scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of ask your specialised workshop to replace the
damaging the paint job! belt in question. »
297
Maintenance
298
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle
Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- For this reason we recommend asking official Mobile radio transmitters
rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is SEAT service centres to do any necessary Commercial mobile telephones or radio
driven, such as a cruise control system or work using genuine SEAT parts®. equipment might interfere with the electron-
electronically-controlled suspension, must ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
be approved for use in your vehicle and bear WARNING This may be due to:
the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- Incorrectly performed modifications or
tion symbol). other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- ● No external aerial.
If any additional electrical devices are fit- functions and cause accidents. ● External aerial incorrectly installed.
ted which do not serve to control the vehicle ● Transmitting power more than 10 W.
itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop
or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the Radio telephones and office equip- You must, therefore, do not operate portable
sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
ment the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
the European Union).
nal aerial ››› .
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
WARNING Please note also that the maximum range of
Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters
Accessories, for example telephone hold- in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT the equipment can only be achieved with an
ers or cup holders, should never be fitted external aerial.
generally authorises in-vehicle installations
on the covers, or within the working range
of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger Business equipment
ded that:
of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-
dent. Retrofit installation of business or private
● The antenna is installed correctly.
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- driver's immediate control of the vehicle and
Technical modifications gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). that any such equipment carries the mark.
● The effective transmitting power does not Any retrofit equipment that could influence
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic the driver's control of the vehicle must have a
exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
components, software, wiring or data transfer type approval for your vehicle and must carry
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- the e mark.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership shop will be able to inform you about options
cannot be held liable for any damage for installing and operating radio transmitters WARNING
caused by modifications and/or work per- with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile telephones or radio equipment
formed incorrectly. which is operated inside the vehicle without »
299
Maintenance
Note
● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-
tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its
licence and could lead to the withdrawal of
the vehicle registration document under
certain circumstances.
● Please use the mobile telephone/radio
operating instructions.
300
Information for the user
Information for the user These data will provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances of the accident.
vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-
face while the vehicle is switched on.
Data from the driving assist systems are also SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless
Information for the user recorded. This includes data such as whether the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee
the systems were inactive or active and if or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-
such action had an impact on the vehicle’s ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-
Information stored by the dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the tractual provisions.
control units aforementioned situations, accelerating or
Due to legal requirements in safety-related
decelerating the vehicle.
products, SEAT may use the EDR data for
Storage of accident data (Event Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- field research and in order to improve vehicle
Data Recorder) cludes data from systems such as: system quality. Any data used for the purpo-
ses of research will be treated anonymously
Your vehicle has an event data recorder ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(in other words, no reference will be made to
(EDR). ● Emergency brake assistance system (Front the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).
Assist).
The EDR’s function is to record data in the
event of a mild or serious accident. These da- ● Park Pilot system
ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-
The EDR data are only recorded in specific Other important information
ferent vehicle systems behaved.
accident situations. No data are recorded in
The EDR records, over a reduced time range normal driving conditions. Environmental compatibility
(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-
No audio or video data inside or around the
ing data and data from the restraint systems, Environmental protection is a top priority in
vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-
such as: the design, choice of materials and manufac-
ces are personal data such as name, age, or
ture of your new SEAT.
● How different vehicle systems worked. gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties
● Whether the driver and the occupants were (such as criminal proceedings authorities)
Constructive measures to encourage re-
may relate the contents of the EDR data to
wearing their seat belts. cycling
other data sources and create a personal
● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal ● Joints and connections designed for easy
reference in the context of an accident inves-
was pressed. tigation. dismantling.
● Vehicle speed. ● Modular construction to facilitate disman-
In order to read the EDR data it is necessary
● GPS position. to access (if legally permitted to do so) the tling.
● Increased use of single-grade materials. »
301
Information for the user
● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
www.seat.com/generalinfo
ISO 1629. etc.).
United Kingdom
● The use of water-soluble paints.
Choice of materials Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-
● Use of recycled materials.
clare that they comply with the UK Radio
● Use of compatible plastics in the same part Recycling of electrical or electron- Equipment Regulations 2017 (SI 2017/1206) if
if its components are not easily separated. ic devices required by law.
● Use of recycled materials and/or materials
All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that The full text of the declaration of conformity is
originating from renewable sources.
are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must available online at the following Internet ad-
● Reduction of volatile components, including dress:
be marked with the following symbol:
odour, in plastic materials.
● Use of CFC-free coolants. www.seat.com/generalinfo
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions This symbol indicates that EED must not be
Ukraine
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive discarded as home waste but through selec-
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, tive waste collection. Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
hexavalent chromium. ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Ukraine Decree
355/2017 (TR Radio Equipment) where legal-
Manufacturing methods
Radioelectrical equipment ly required.
● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities. The full text of the declaration of conformity is
Simplified declaration of conformi- available online at the following Internet ad-
● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-
ty dress:
cle transport.
● Use of solvent-free adhesives. Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- www.seat.com/generalinfo
● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Directive
tems.
2014/53/EU when legally required.
● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- Addresses of the manufacturers
dues (RDF). The full text of the EU compliance declaration
is available online at the following address: The address of the manufacturers of compo-
● Improvement in the quality of waste water.
nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot
302
Information for the user
include a sticker are listed below, as long as it Antenna amplifiers KATHREIN Automotive GmbH
is legally required: ASK Industries S.p.A Römerring 1
Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16 31137 Hildesheim, Germany
Central control unit (BCM) 60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy Phone: +498031184-0
Phone: +3907174521 Website: www.kathrein.com
Robert Bosch GmbH/Braunschweig
Theodor-Heuss-Strasse 12 Website: www.askgroup.it
38122 - Braunschweig, Germany Connectivity Box
Phone: 0049 53188890 Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH
Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 Märkische Strasse 72
72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany 15806 Zossen OT Dabendorf, Germany
Keyless Access system
Phone: +49 7127 140 Phone:+49 3377 3160
HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA/Hamm Website: www.te.com Website: www.molex.com
Roemerstr. 66
59075 - Hamm, Germany KATHREIN Automotive GmbH
Phone: 0049 23817980 Römerring 1 Basic infotainment system
31137 Hildesheim, Germany Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech
Roof antenna Phone: +498031184-0 U Panasonicu 266
Website: www.kathrein.com 530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic
ASK Industries S.p.A
Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16 Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH
60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy Optional infotainment system
Daimlerring 31
Phone: +3907174521 31135 Hildesheim, Germany LG Electronics Mlawa SP
Website: www.askgroup.it Phone: +49 3377 3160 LG Electronics 7
Website: www.molex.com 06 500, Mlawa
Mitsumi Electronics Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 32 Remote control key
Navigation antenna
63225 Langen, Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 6103913-0 Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH Digades GmbH Digitales Und Ana/Zittau
Website: www.minebeamitsumi.co.jp Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 Äußere Weberstr. 20
72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany 02763 - Zittau, Germany
Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH Phone: +49 7127 140 Phone: 0049 358357750 »
Daimlerring 31 Website: www.te.com
31135 Hildesheim, Germany
Phone: +49 3377 3160
Website: www.molex.com
303
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)
433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW
Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) All SEAT models
868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW
434.42 MHz 32 µW
Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
heater) 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW Alhambra
304
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW Alhambra
Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating)
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Radar sensors for rear assist systems 24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 5W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco »
305
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Ibiza, Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and
Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m
Alhambra
Online Connectivity Unit E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Additional information for coun- available online at the following Internet ad- conditions: (1) this equipment or device may
dress: not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
tries outside the European Union
equipment or device must accept any inter-
Mexico https://www.seat.mx/servicio/mi-seat/manual- ference, including interference that may
del-propietario.html cause undesired operation.
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- Certificate: RLVHERS17-0286. RS4 Hella United Kingdom
clare that they comply with Directive KGaA Hueck & Co. short-range radar
RLVCOAR15-0008 when legally required. The IFT:RLVHERS17-0286. The operation of this This vehicle has various radio equipment de-
full text of the declaration of conformity is equipment is subject to the following two vices installed.
306
Information for the user
Türkiye
Telsiz Ekipmanları Yönetmeliği
(2014/53/AB)
Aracınızda çeşitli telsiz ekipmanları bulun-
maktadır.
Telsiz Ekipmanlari Yönetmeliği (2014/53/AB)
açısından Türkiye pazarı için radyo ekipmanı
ithalatçısı (bu bilgi sadece resmi temsilcimiz
olan Doğuş Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A.Ş.’nin
ithal ettiği ürünler için geçerlidir):
Ukraine
Імпортер:
ТОВ «Порше Україна»
просп. Павла Тичини, 1В, офіс „В“, 4-й
поверх
02152 Київ, Україна.
307
Technical data
Technical data Vehicle identification data vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,
road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-
Vehicle ID number mental conditions, load or number of passen-
Indications about the The vehicle ID number can be found in the
gers.
following places:
technical data
● One the vehicle's data label. Filling capacities
Important information ● In front, under the windscreen.
Tank level
● To the right in the engine compartment.
Introduction Petrol engines 40 l, 7 l reserve
Type plate approx. 13.8 kg
The values indicated in the technical data Natural gas en-
The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right Additional petrol tank: 9 l, of
ginea)
may differ depending on optional equipment hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export which approx 7.6 l is a reserve
or version of the model, as well as in the case countries do not have a type plate. a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac-
of special vehicles and equipment for certain
teristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indi-
countries. cated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200
bar.
The information in the official vehicle docu- Fuel consumption
mentation takes precedence at all times. Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-
Approved consumption values are derived tainer
Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- from measurements performed or supervised
Windscreen washer
fications section by certified EU laboratories, according to the approx. 3 litres
fluid container
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
PS
used to denote engine power. ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and Weights
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed. Load on the roof
The values relating to fuel consumption and
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. The maximum authorised roof load for your
CO2 emissions can be found in the documen-
tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- vehicle is 75 kg.
Cetane number, indication of the die-
CZ
sel combustion power. cle at the time of purchase.
Research octane number, indication of Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-
RON
the knock resistance of petrol. pend on the equipment/features of each indi-
308
Indications about the technical data
Trailer weight
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the
ball head of the towing bracket is 50 kg.
WARNING
The values indicated for the maximum per-
mitted weights must not be exceeded.
There is a risk of accident and damage!
309
Technical data
Engine specifications
Top speed (km/h) 170 (IV) 186 (V) 195 (V) 195 (VI)
Petrol engines 1.0 EcoTSI Start-Stop 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 1.6 MPI
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/5,000-5,500 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800
310
Indications about the technical data
CNG
Fuel
Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox manual
311
Technical data
Dimensions.
312
Index
Index Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Anti-trap function
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Numbers and Symbols activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
12-volt battery control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Apple CarPlay
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 277 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Air conditioning requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
A manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ABS usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Aspects to think about before starting the ve-
see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ASR
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 298 Alternator see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Assistance systems
Active cylinder management (ACT) Android Auto™ adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 217
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 230
Adjust components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . 230, 233
headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 75
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
313
Index
Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Bicycle carrier selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 installing on the tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Audible warning Blown bulbs front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 270 tail light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 114 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Checking levels
emergency release of the selector lever. . . 204 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Check lists
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Braking system requirements for Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . 164
operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . 163
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 requirements for MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 C Childproof locks
steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 201 Camera electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 201 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Child seats
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Capacities group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
B Care securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Background lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34, 35
Backrest of the rear seat Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Cleaning the vehicle
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 293
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
314
Index
Clocks lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . . 231 Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . . . 161
set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Deactivation of cylinders
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 69
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 220 Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Display of road signs on the instrument panel
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 262 activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Disposal
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Distance control
Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Controls and displays Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Convenience close function child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Convenience open function Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 240 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Cooling system Drink holder
braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Driver
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Driving
emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Cruise control system economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 240 Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . . 145 safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 210
gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 D with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 255, 260
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
315
Index
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Rotation direction Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Running in SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
S information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Service Menu
S-PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safety Seats time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 201
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Side airbags
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Save fuel Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Special characteristics
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
adjusting de seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Service tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 22 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
322
Index
325
Index
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Winter conditions
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Wiper and rear window wiper blades
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Wiper blades
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
X
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
326
Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
Model:
The following items were delivered
YES NO
with the vehicle:
Vehicle Registration:
On-board documentation
Vehicle identification
number: First key
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
Service advisor:
All rights on changes are reserved.
Telephone:
❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.21
Inglés 6F0012720BS (11.21)
6F0012720BS